advertisement
MPS 200/800
MPS 200
MPS 800
!"
Join up to 40/160 video and 32/48 audio sites in one or more conferences
!"
19” rack-mountable chassis with LCD in front and
CompactPCI backplane
!"
Wide range of network and protocol support: SIP,
IP, ISDN and V.35
!"
Supports H.264 with Continuous Presence and
Voice Switching
!"
Modular and expandable with multiple media processing boards and network interface boards
!"
Bandwidth: from 56 kbps–2 Mbps
!"
Supports Simultaneous display of presenter and presentations, Dual Video Stream (DuoVideo
TF
,
H.239 or BFCP) including PC presentations using
VGA, SVGA and XGA resolutions
!"
Simple to configure, Plug-and-Play technology
!"
Supports network and video equipment from multiple vendors
!"
Outbound, Inbound, and Caller ID password protection
!"
Supports widescreen HD resolution (1280x720p)
!"
Flexible design as MCU, Gateway or hybrid
!"
Highest level of standards based embedded encryption
!"
Supports TANDBERG Expressway
TM
firewall traversal, H.460.18 and H.460.19.
Administrator
Guide
Software version J4.5
D13373.10
April 2009
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Administrator Guide
1
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
What’s in
Chapter 0 - Table of Contents
Hidden text anchor
this guide?
MPS 200
click on them to go to the topic.
MPS 800
web site regularly for an updated version of this guide.
Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us Using the MPS
Table of contents
What’s new in version J4.5? ................................................ 5
Disclaimer, Patent Info, License Agreement, Trademark & Copyright
Third Party Software, Licenses and Copyright ...................... 7
Safety Instructions ........................................................... 13
Environmental Issues ....................................................... 14
China RoHS Table ............................................................. 15
Features overview and MPS capacity ................................. 16
TANDBERG MPS at a Glance ............................................. 17
Precautions, Unpacking and Mounting ............................... 19
System overview .............................................................. 20
MPS 200 with 2 Media Processing Boards.................... 20
MPS 200 with ISDN and V.35 Network Cards ................ 21
MPS 800 with 8 Media Processing Cards ..................... 22
MPS 800 with ISDN and V.35 Network Cards ................ 23
Connecting cables ............................................................ 24
Starting up the system ..................................................... 25
The LCD interface ............................................................. 26
System Controller Board ................................................... 27
Media Processing Board ................................................... 28
The web interface ............................................................. 29
Quick setup ...................................................................... 30
Step 1: IP Configuration ............................................... 30
Step 2: H.323 Configuration ........................................ 31
Step 3: PRI Configuration ............................................. 32
Step 4: Dial In Configuration ........................................ 33
MCU Overview, Usage Information ..................................... 35
MCU Conference Overview ................................................ 36
Create conference ............................................................ 38
Conference Configuration ............................................. 38
Video, Conference Layout ............................................ 40
Video settings ............................................................. 41
Audio settings ............................................................. 45
Security settings ......................................................... 46
Participants settings .................................................... 48
Network settings ......................................................... 49
Manage an active conference ........................................... 50
Overview MCU .................................................................. 51
Conference Status ...................................................... 51
Add Participants ......................................................... 53
Add Participants - Examples ......................................... 56
Edit Conference Configuration ..................................... 57
Dial-In Configuration ................................................... 58
Conference status, the Basic tab ................................. 59
Conference status, the Advanced tab ........................... 62
Conference status, the Terminal List tab ...................... 63
Conference status, the Change tab .............................. 64
The Gateway .................................................................... 65
Gateway Features ........................................................ 65
Gateway Capacity ........................................................ 65
Gateway Usage Information .......................................... 66
Gateway Calls Overview ............................................... 67
Disconnect a Gateway call ........................................... 68
Transfer a Gateway call ................................................ 69
The Phone book ............................................................... 70
My Contacts, Add New Entry ........................................ 71
My Contacts, Edit New Entry ........................................ 72
Add Group Entry .......................................................... 73
H.320 Board Status ......................................................... 75
ISDN PRI Board Status ..................................................... 76
G.703 Board Status.......................................................... 77
Serial V.35 Board Status .................................................. 78
Media Board IP Status ...................................................... 79
H.323 Status ................................................................... 80
SIP Status ....................................................................... 81
System Information .......................................................... 82
2
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
H.320 Board Configuration ............................................... 86
PRI Board Configuration .................................................... 87
G.703 Board Configuration ............................................... 94
IP Configuration ............................................................... 96
Media Board Configuration ............................................... 98
Serial V.35 Board Configuration ........................................ 99
H.323 Configuration ....................................................... 101
Language, Set Language and Language files ................... 107
Language, Files.., Dialog pictures .................................... 108
Language, Files.., Dialog Sounds and Symbols ................ 109
Configuration using XML ................................................. 110
Certificate Management ................................................. 111
Gateway Functionality and Dialling Rules ......................... 113
Gateway Configuration .................................................... 114
Dialling Rules ............................................................ 114
Examples of dialling rules with ISDN Gateway ............. 115
Examples of dialling rules with V.35 Gateway .............. 116
Examples of dialling rules with G.703 Gateway ............ 117
Gateway Settings ....................................................... 118
MCU Configuration ......................................................... 123
The Dial-In Numbers menu overview ........................... 123
The Single Dial-In Number menu ................................ 124
The AdHoc Conferences menu.................................... 125
The Static Conferences menu .................................... 126
The Personal Conferences menu ................................ 128
The Direct AdHoc Conferences menu .......................... 130
The Network Profiles menu ........................................ 131
Conference Template Configuration ............................ 132
MCU Conference Template .............................................. 133
Conference Layouts ................................................... 134
Video settings ........................................................... 135
Audio settings ........................................................... 139
Security settings ....................................................... 140
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Participants settings .................................................. 142
Network settings ....................................................... 143
MCU Configuration ......................................................... 144
File Management ....................................................... 144
The System Controller Board Interface ............................ 147
The Media Processing Board Interface ............................ 148
E1/T1 Network Interface Card (IIC-8) .............................. 149
V.35 Serial Interface Card (SIC-32) .................................. 152
Cable Description ...................................................... 153
Power Supplies .............................................................. 154
MPS 800–Inserting additional network interface cards .... 155
MPS 200–Inserting additional network interface cards .... 156
About the Quality of Service (QoS) feature ....................... 157
About video features ...................................................... 158
About other features ...................................................... 160
Distributed MCUs ........................................................... 162
Ports and Packet Sizes ................................................... 163
Secure Conference (Encryption) ...................................... 164
System Management Tools ............................................. 165
System Management and Security .................................. 166
Product Approvals and CE Declarations ........................... 167
SIP - Current RFC’s and Drafts Supported ........................ 168
Configuring LCS and MPS for SIP .................................... 169
Configuring OCS 2007 and MPS for SIP ........................... 175
Technical Specifications ................................................. 181
TANDBERG MPS 200 ................................................. 181
TANDBERG MPS 800 ................................................. 183
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
3
Contents
MPS 200/800
Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Chapter 1
Introduction
Thank you for choosing TANDBERG!
The TANDBERG MPS enables sites on IP, ISDN and High Speed Serial to participate in meetings with each other and offers superior quality and ease of use in one fully-featured multipoint control unit.
#$%"&$"'()*"&+,-"*$./0(1&
You will find that some places information has been copied from other chapters (but adapted, when needed) to let you have all the relevant information there and then. This helps eliminating the need to read through long sections before you can even think of getting started.
Our main objective with this user guide is to address your goals and needs. Please let us know how well we succeeded!
Stay up-to-date
We recommend you visit the TANDBERG web site regularly for an updated version of this guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs
In this chapter...
Features overview and MPS capacity
4
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Getting started
What’s new in version J4.5?
Version J4 of the TANDBERG MPS provides several new capabilities and enhancements. For your convenience a list of them is provided here.
Software release note
See the MPS Software Release Note for detailed description of the new API commands and features. The software release note is found at the TANDBERG web site.
Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/support/documentation.
php?p=Upgrades_and_Diagnostics
Knowledge base
Troubleshooting and FAQs are available at the TANDBERG web site:
Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/support/knowledgebase
MPS API guide
See the MPS API guide for a complete overview of the MPS
API commands. The TANDBERG MPS API Guide is found at the
TANDBERG web site.
Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Security
!"
Strict password (new API command)
!"
Legacy encryption mode (new API command)
!"
Security level (new API command)
!"
Deny root access (new API command)
!"
Security log (new API command)
!"
API login failure lock
!"
Login banner
Security log files
The MPS now supports security logging. To enable/disable
Security logging run the following command: xConfiguration SecurityLog Mode: <On/Off>
When enabled the events will be logged to a security log file.
The security log file can be accessed from:
!"
The MPS web interface at http://x.x.x.x/securitylog or https://x.x.x.x/securitylog,
!" or via Telnet, SSH or Serial Port at /var/log/messages while logged in as root.
H264
!"
Improved support for H.264-only-participants (for example
TANDBERG Movi)
IPv6
!"
HTTP or HTTPS access over IPv6
Stability
!"
Several bug fixes, see the MPS Software Release Note for detailed descriptions.
Older log files are stored in the
/tandberg/log/save/ directory, with filename message.X, where X is a number.
5
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Contents Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Disclaimer, Patent Info, License Agreement, Trademark & Copyright
Disclaimer
The information in this document is furnished for informational purposes only, is subject to change without prior notice, and should not be construed as a commitment by TANDBERG.
The information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable; however TANDBERG assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties resulting from its use. No license is granted under any patents or patent rights of TANDBERG.
This document was written by the Research and Development
Department of TANDBERG, Norway. We are committed to maintain a high level of quality in all our documentation. Towards this effort, we welcome you to Contact us with comments and suggestions regarding the content and structure of this document.
Patent information
The products described in this manual are covered by one or more of the following patents:
US6,584,077
US5,768,263
US7.283.588
US5,838,664
US5,991,277
EP01953201
Other patents pending.
US5,600,646
US7,034,860
GB1338127
License Agreement
All rights reserved. This document contains information that is proprietary to TANDBERG. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, electronically, mechanically, by photocopying, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of TAND-
BERG. Nationally and internationally recognized trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Trademark and Copyright
Copyright © 2005–2007 TANDBERG. All rights reserved. TAND-
BERG is a registered trademark of TANDBERG ASA and/or its subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
6
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Third Party Software, Licenses and Copyright
Third Party Software
Amended / Expanded Copyright notices for thirdparty software on the TANDBERG MPS systems are listed below:
Full copies of the licenses and warranty statements are located on the product CD in the license files directory.
The non-commercial third party code is distributed in binary form under the terms of non-copyleft style open source licenses such as BSD, Artistic or MIT/X
Consortium.
The product also has some binary code distributed under the terms of the GNU public license with an exemption which allows static links to non-copyleft commercial code.
In accordance with section (3) of the GNU General
Public License, copies of such code will be provided upon request by contacting TANDBERG. Please contact us by using the Online Support section at www.tandberg.com or the “contact us” section of this manual. Please provide USD 10.00 for media and shipping.
(c) UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
All or some portions of this file are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories,
Inc.
Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE
Project. * All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2000 Brian Somers <brian@Awfulhak.
org>
Copyright (c) 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc. * All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1997 Niklas Hallqvist. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 1988 Stephen Deering.
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to
Berkeley by Stephen Deering of Stanford University.
Portions of eCos code are distributed under several
BSD style licenses. Other portions of eCos code are distributed under the terms of the GNU General
Public License with a non-copyleft exception which
!""#$%&%'!'()&"(*+%&'#&*#* &,)#-."/0'-1#21!3%4
234)
Contains iType™ from Agfa Monotype Corporation.
(5$eCos, the Embedded Configurable Operating System.
Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003
Red Hat, Inc.
Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 John Dallaway
Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Nick Garnett
Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Jonathan Larmour Copyright (C) 2002, 2003 Andrew Lunn Copyright (C)
2002, 2003 Gary Thomas Copyright (C) 2002, 2003
Bart Veer
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
678)&"9:;"8)'-('<
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source
Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
Expat maintainers.
The ExPat XML parser is distributed under the terms of the ExPat License which is a MIT/X Consortium style open source license
=5>
ICU License - ICU 1.8.1 Copyright (c) 1995-2003
International Business Machines Corporation and others All rights reserved.
ICU is distributed under the terms of the ICU license, which is a MIT/X Consortium style license.
;=56?@6"ABC":,-.(DD)1($/-"E8;FD,.(1-(*"-$4&%)'("
This TANDBERG product contains software from various third-party vendors which is licensed under the
GNU General Public License (GNU GPL).
The list of GPL-licensed software includes (but is not limited to) The Linux kernel, Busybox, and PAM.
The full text of the GNU General Public License may be viewed at http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].
5.
Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6.
Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL
Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http:// www.openssl.org/)”
;=56?@6"ABC"BG(1@@;
;=56?@6"=@@>6@
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact [email protected].
BG(1@@;";,.(1-(
Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
4.
The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL
Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL
PROJECT ”AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL
PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (IN-
CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LI-
ABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
B',3,1)D"@@;()H";,.(1-(
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.
com). All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by
Eric Young ([email protected]).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
7
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Third Party Software, Licenses and Copyright,
cont...
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The
SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any
Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-
AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTER-
RUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the
GNU Public Licence.]
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@ cryptsoft.com)”. The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4.
If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by
Tim Hudson ([email protected])”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS
;=56?@6"ABC"$G(1--+
The licences which components of this software fall under are as follows. First, we will summarize and say that all components are under a BSD licence, or a licence more free than that.
BG(1@@#".$1&),1-"1$"E8;".$*(I
8)'&"J
Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <[email protected]>,
Espoo, Finland. All rights reserved
As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software can be used freely for any purpose.
Any derived versions of this software must be clearly marked as such, and if the derived work is incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file, it must be called by a name other than “ssh” or
“Secure Shell”. However, I am not implying to give any licenses to any patents or copyrights held by third parties, and the software includes parts that are not under my direct control. As far as I know, all included source code is used in accordance with the relevant license agreements and can be used freely for any purpose (the GNU license being the most restrictive); see below for details.
However, none of that term is relevant at this point in time. All of these restrictively licenced software components which he talks about have been removed from OpenSSH, i.e.,
!"
RSA is no longer included, found in the OpenSSL library
!"
IDEA is no longer included, its use is deprecated
!"
DES is now external, in the OpenSSL library
!"
GMP is no longer used, and instead we call BN code from OpenSSL
!"
Zlib is now external, in a library
!"
The make-ssh-known-hosts script is no longer included
!"
TSS has been removed
!"
MD5 is now external, in the OpenSSL library
!"
RC4 support has been replaced with ARC4 support from OpenSSL
!"
Blowfish is now external, in the OpenSSL library
Note that any information and cryptographic algorithms used in this software are publicly available on the Internet and at any major bookstore, scientific library, and patent office worldwide. More information can be found e.g. at “http://www.cs.hut.fi/crypto”.
The legal status of this program is some combination of all these permissions and restrictions. Use only at your own responsibility. You will be responsible for any legal consequences yourself; I am not making any claims whether possessing or using this is legal or not in your country, and I am not taking any responsibility on your behalf.
NO WARRANTY
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PRO-
GRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE
LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRIT-
ING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE
RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE
OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPY-
RIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY
MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM
AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARIS-
ING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS
OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE
OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES
OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBIL-
ITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
8)'&"K
The 32-bit CRC compensation attack detector in deattack.c was contributed by CORE SDI S.A. under a BSD-style license.
Cryptographic attack detector for ssh - source code
Copyright (c) 1998 CORE SDI S.A., Buenos Aires,
Argentina.
All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that this copyright notice is retained.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EX-
PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CORE SDI S.A. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EX-
EMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OR MISUSE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Ariel Futoransky <[email protected]>
<http://www.core-sdi.com>
8
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Third Party Software, Licenses and Copyright,
cont...
8)'&"L ssh-keygen was contributed by David Mazieres under a BSD-style license.
Copyright 1995, 1996 by David Mazieres <dm@lcs.
mit.edu>.
Modification and redistribution in source and binary forms is permitted provided that due credit is given to the author and the OpenBSD project by leaving this copyright notice intact.
8)'&"M
The Rijndael implementation by Vincent Rijmen,
Antoon Bosselaers and Paulo Barreto is in the public domain and distributed with the following license:
@version 3.0 (December 2000)
Optimised ANSI C code for the Rijndael cipher (now
AES)
@author Vincent Rijmen <vincent.rijmen@esat.
kuleuven.ac.be>
@author Antoon Bosselaers <antoon.bosselaers@ esat.kuleuven.ac.be>
@author Paulo Barreto <[email protected].
br>
This code is hereby placed in the public domain.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHORS “AS
IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-
AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTER-
RUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
8)'&"N
One component of the ssh source code is under a 3-clause BSD license, held by the University of
California, since we pulled these parts from original
Berkeley code.
Copyright (c) 1983, 1990, 1992, 1993, 1995
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions Are met:
!"
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
!"
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
!"
Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS
AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (IN-
CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LI-
ABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
8)'&"O
Remaining components of the software are provided under a standard 2-term BSD licence with the following names as copyright holders:
Markus Friedl
Theo de Raadt
Niels Provos
Dug Song
Aaron Campbell
Damien Miller
Kevin Steves
Daniel Kouril
Per Allansson
Wesley Griffin
Per Allansson
Nils Nordman
Simon Wilkinson
Portable OpenSSH additionally includes code from the following copyright holders, also under the
2-term BSD license:
Ben Lindstrom
Tim Rice
Andre Lucas
Chris Adams
Corinna Vinschen
Cray Inc.
Denis Parker
Gert Doering
Jakob Schlyter
Jason Downs
Juha Yrjölä
Michael Stone
Networks Associates Technology, Inc.
Solar Designer
Todd C. Miller
Wayne Schroeder
William Jones
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
!"
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
!"
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS
IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEM-
PLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTI-
TUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW-
EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
8)'&"P
Portable OpenSSH contains the following additional licenses: a) md5crypt.c, md5crypt.h
“THE BEER-WARE LICENSE” (Revision 42):
<[email protected]> wrote this file. As long as you retain this notice you can do whatever you want with this stuff. If we meet some day, and you think this stuff is worth it, you can buy me a beer in return.
Poul-Henning Kamp b) snprintf replacement
Copyright Patrick Powell 1995
9
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Third Party Software, Licenses and Copyright,
cont...
This code is based on code written by Patrick Powell
([email protected]) It may be used for any purpose as long as this notice remains intact on all source code distributions c) Compatibility code (openbsd-compat)
Apart from the previously mentioned licenses, various pieces of code in the openbsd-compat/ subdirectory are licensed as follows:
Some code is licensed under a 3-term BSD license, to the following copyright holders:
Todd C. Miller
Theo de Raadt
Damien Miller
Eric P. Allman
The Regents of the University of California
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
!"
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
!"
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
!"
Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IM-
PLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUD-
ING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Some code is licensed under an ISC-style license, to the following copyright holders:
Internet Software Consortium.
Todd C. Miller
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND TODD C.
MILLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD
TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WAR-
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN
NO EVENT SHALL TODD C. MILLER BE LIABLE FOR
ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUEN-
TIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THIS SOFTWARE.
Some code is licensed under a MIT-style license to the following copyright holders:
Free Software Foundation, Inc. notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNEC-
TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization.
-1G',1&4
Copyright 1999, Mark Martinec. mark.martinec@ijs.
si All rights reserved
Snprintf is distributed under the terms of the snprintf license, which is a Frontier Artistic style open source license.
A standard copy of snprintf can be located at the author’s web site: http://www.ijs.si/software/snprintf/ xSupplicant (wpa_supplicant) 802.1x
Copyright (c) 2002-2005, Jouni Malinen jkmaline@ cc.hut.fi
xSupplicant is distributed under the terms of the xSupplicant license, which is a BSD style open source license.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
;=56?@6"ABC";(--
Copyright (C) 1984-2002 Mark Nudelman
;=56?@6"ABC"D,Q(*,&
Copyright (c) 1992, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to
Berkeley by Christos Zoulas of Cornell University.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3.
All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4.
Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IM-
PLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUD-
ING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
;=56?@6"ABC"D-$4
Copyright 1994 Purdue Research Foundation, West
10
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Third Party Software, Licenses and Copyright,
cont...
Lafayette, Indiana 47907. All rights reserved.
Written by Victor A. Abell
This software is not subject to any license of the
American Telephone and Telegraph Company or the
Regents of the University of California.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose on any computer system, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1.
Neither the authors nor Purdue University are responsible for any consequences of the use of this software.
2.
The origin of this software must not be misrepresented, either by explicit claim or by omission.
Credit to the authors and Purdue University must appear in documentation and sources.
3.
Altered versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.
4.
This notice may not be removed or altered.
;=56?@6"ABC"1(&F-10G
Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in 4 separate parts below. Please make sure that you read all the parts. Up until 2001, the project was based at UC Davis, and the first part covers all code written during this time. From 2001 onwards, the project has been based at SourceForge, and Networks Associates Technology, Inc hold the copyright on behalf of the wider Net-SNMP community, covering all derivative work done since then. An additional copyright section has been added as Part 3 below also under a BSD license for the work contributed by
Cambridge Broadband Ltd. to the project since 2001.
An additional copyright section has been added as
Part 4 below also under a BSD license for the work contributed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. to the project since 2003.
Code has been contributed to this project by many people over the years it has been in development, and a full list of contributors can be found in the
README file under the THANKS section.
8)'&"J<"5:>R>5S".$GH',3+&"1$&,.(<"TU@S"D,V(W
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon
University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the
University of California.
All Rights Reserved with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
!"
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
!"
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
!"
Neither the name of the Networks Associates
Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promoteproducts derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of
California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF
CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH RE-
GARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNEC-
TION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-
AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTER-
RUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
8)'&"K<"?(&%$'V-"2--$.,)&(-"X(.+1$D$3HY"=1.".$GHF
',3+&"1$&,.("TU@SW
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates
Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
8)'&"L<"5)0Q',*3("U'$)*Q)1*";&*I".$GH',3+&"1$&,.("
TU@SW
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003,
Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
!"
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
!"
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
!"
The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCI-
DENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PRO-
CUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
8)'&"M<"@/1":,.'$-H-&(0-Y"=1.I".$GH',3+&"1$&,.("
TU@SW
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150
Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A.
All rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
11
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Contents Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Third Party Software, Licenses and Copyright,
cont...
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
!"
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
!"
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
!"
Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-
AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTER-
RUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
!"
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
!"
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
!"
Neither the name of the Networks Associates
Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAM-
AGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTER-
RUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
;=56?@6"ABC"G$G&
Copyright (c) 1998 Red Hat Software
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the
X Consortium shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consortium.
;=56?@6"ABC"ZD,Q zlib is (C) 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark
Adler.
8)'&"N<"@G)'&)Y"=1.".$GH',3+&"1$&,.("TU@SW
Copyright (c) 2003, Sparta, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
12
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Safety Instructions
For your protection please read these safety instructions completely before you connect the equipment to the power source. Carefully observe all warnings, precautions and instructions both on the apparatus and in these operating instructions.
Retain this manual for future reference.
Lightning
Never use this apparatus, or connect/disconnect communication cables or power cables during lightning storms.
Water and Moisture
!"
Do not operate the apparatus under or near water – for example near a bathtub, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, near a swimming pool or in other areas with high humidity.
!"
Never install jacks for communication cables in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
!"
Do not touch the product with wet hands.
Cleaning
!"
Unplug the apparatus from communication lines, mains power-outlet or any power source before cleaning or polishing.
!"
Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
!"
Use a lint-free cloth lightly moistened with water for cleaning the exterior of the apparatus.
Ventilation
!"
Do not block any of the ventilation openings of the apparatus.
!"
Never cover the slots and openings with a cloth or other material.
!"
Never install the apparatus near heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
!"
Do not place the product in direct sunlight or close to a surface directly heated by the sun.
Dust
Do not operate the apparatus in areas with high concentration of dust.
Vibration
Do not operate the apparatus in areas with vibration or place it on an unstable surface.
Power Connection and Hazardous Voltage
!"
The product may have hazardous voltage inside. Never attempt to open this product, or any peripherals connected to the product, where this action requires a tool.
!"
This product should always be powered from an earthed power outlet.
!"
Never connect attached power supply cord to other products.
!"
In case any parts of the product has visual damage never attempt to connect mains power, or any other power source, before consulting service personnel
!"
The plug connecting the power cord to the product/power supply serves as the main disconnect device for this equipment. The power cord must always be easily accessible.
!"
Route the power cord so as to avoid it being walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against it. Pay particular attention to the plugs, receptacles and the point where the cord exits from the apparatus.
!"
Do not tug the power cord
!"
If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician.
!"
Never install cables, or any peripherals, without first unplugging the device from it’s power source.
Servicing
Do not attempt to service the apparatus yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other hazards, and will void the warranty. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Unplug the apparatus from its power source and refer servicing to qualified personnel under the following conditions:
!"
If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed
!"
If liquid has been spilled into the apparatus
!"
If objects have fallen into the apparatus
!"
If the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture
!"
If the apparatus has been subjected to excessive shock by being dropped
!"
If the cabinet has been damaged
!"
If the apparatus seems to be overheated
!"
If the apparatus emits smoke or abnormal odor
!"
If the apparatus fails to operate in accordance with the operating instructions.
Accessories
Use only accessories specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
Communication Lines
!"
Never touch uninstalled communication wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
!"
Do not use communication equipment to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
!"
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No. 26
AWG or larger telecommunication line cord
(ISDN cables).
Product Approvals
Information about product approvals and CE declarations are found in the
in the Appendices section.
13
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Contents Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Environmental Issues
Thank you for buying a product which contributes to a reduction in pollution, and thereby helps save the environment. Our products reduce the need for travel and transport and thereby reduce pollution. Our products have either none or few consumable parts (chemicals, toner, gas, paper). Our products are low energy consuming products.
TANDBERG’s Environmental Policy
Environmental stewardship is important to
TANDBERG’s culture. As a global company with strong corporate values, TANDBERG is committed to following international environmental legislation and designing technologies that help companies, individuals and communities creatively address environmental challenges.
TANDBERG’s environmental objectives are to:
!"
Develop products that reduce energy consumption, CO
2 congestion
emissions, and traffic
!"
Provide products and services that improve quality of life for our customers
!"
Produce products that can be recycled or disposed of safely at the end of product life
!"
Comply with all relevant environmental legislation.
European Environmental Directives
As a manufacturer of electrical and electronic equipment TANDBERG is responsible for compliance with the requirements in the European
Directives 2002/96/EC (WEEE) and 2002/95/
EC (RoHS).
The primary aim of the WEEE Directive and RoHS
Directive is to reduce the impact of disposal of electrical and electronic equipment at end-oflife. The WEEE Directive aims to reduce the amount of WEEE sent for disposal to landfill or incineration by requiring producers to arrange for collection and recycling. The RoHS Directive bans the use of certain heavy metals and brominated flame retardants to reduce the environmental impact of WEEE which is landfilled or incinerated.
TANDBERG has implemented necessary process changes to comply with the European RoHS
Directive (2002/95/EC) and the European WEEE
Directive (2002/96/EC).
Waste Handling
In order to avoid the dissemination of hazardous substances in our environment and to diminish the pressure on natural resources, we encourage you to use the appropriate take-back systems in your area. Those systems will reuse or recycle most of the materials of your end of life equipment in a sound way.
TANDBERG products put on the market after
August 2005 are marked with a crossed-out wheelie bin symbol that invites you to use those take-back systems.
Please contact your local supplier, the regional waste administration or http://www.tandberg.com/recycling if you need more information on the collection and recycling system in your area.
Information for Recyclers
As part of compliance with the European
WEEE Directive, TANDBERG provides recycling information on request for all types of new equipment put on the market in Europe after
August 13th 2005.
Please contact TANDBERG and provide the following details for the product for which you would like to receive recycling information:
!"
Model number of TANDBERG product
!"
Your company’s name
!"
Contact name
!"
Address
!"
Telephone number
!"
E-mail.
Digital User Guides
TANDBERG is pleased to announce that we have replaced the printed versions of our user guides with a digital CD version. Instead of a range of different user guides, there is now one CD – which can be used with all TANDBERG products
– in a variety of languages. The environmental benefits of this are significant. The CDs are recyclable and the savings on paper are huge.
A simple web-based search feature helps you directly access the information you need. In addition, the TANDBERG video systems now have an intuitive on-screen help function, which provides a range of useful features and tips. The contents of the CD can still be printed locally, whenever needed.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
14
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Contents
China RoHS Table
Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
15
Contents
MPS 200/800
Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Features overview and MPS capacity
This Administrator Guide is provided to help you make the best use of your TANDBERG MPS,
Media Processing System.
The TANDBERG MPS enables sites on IP (H.323 and SIP), ISDN and High Speed Serial (V.35/
RS449/RS530 w/RS366 support) to participate in meetings with each other, and at the same time it offers superior quality and ease of use in one fully-featured multipoint control unit, MCU.
The TANDBERG MPS may also include the optional Gateway functionality.
MPS Models
The TANDBERG MPS can be found in two models, the MPS 800 a 9U-sized unit, and the MPS
200 a 3U-sized unit.
The two models differ in the size of the chassis and the number of boards that they can host.
However there are no differences in the feature set. Therefore in this manual, we will use the term TANDBERG MPS to refer to both models, unless a specific situation requires referring to each model with its own name.
Main Features
!"
IP, ISDN PRI, Leased E1/T1 (G.703) and High
Speed Serial (V.35/RS449/RS530 w/RS366 support) networks are supported at call rates of up to 2 Mbps for each call.
!"
Up to 40 simultaneous conferences with the
MPS 800, and up to 10 simultaneous conferences with the MPS 200.
!"
Up to 160 video sites and 48 telephony calls with the MPS 800 and up to 40 video sites and 32 telephony calls with the MPS 200 can be supported at the same time in some configurations, each benefiting from the same superb audio and video quality. The
TANDBERG MPS can also be used purely as an audio-bridge.
!"
Secure Conference
TF
- using standard based
AES 128 and DES encryption. Support both
H.235 v2 and v3 in the same conference.
!"
Best Impression
TF
- Automatic selection of layout and resolution depending on number of meeting participants.
!"
Numerous different conference layouts, 16:9 wide formats and Voice Switched mode.
!"
Dual Video Stream - support for DuoVideo
TF
,
H.239 and BFCP.
!"
DuoVideo
TF
/H.239/BFCP - automatically distributed to conference participants supporting these protocols. Support for mix of
DuoVideo
TF
and the H.239 or BFCP protocols in same conference. Endpoints not supporting these protocols will receive main stream.
!"
Downspeeding
TF
- if channels are dropped during a videoconferencing session, the connection is automatically re-established without interruption.
!"
Audio and video transcoding to the best quality available.
!"
Secure Access - support SSH, XML/SOAP over HTTPS, Web (HTTP) encrypted password.
The Telnet, SSH, HTTP, HTTPS and SNMP services can be disabled.
!"
Web-interface for system management, call management, diagnostics, multi language and software uploads.
!"
Worldwide compatibility with standards-based videoconferencing systems.
!"
Gateway functionality – Embedded gateway with up to 80 Gateway calls on the MPS 800 and up to 20 Gateway calls on the MPS 200.
!"
Ad Hoc functionality and Single number dial in, with waiting room and dynamic access and authorization mechanisms. Possibility to pre-configure up to 500 personal conference and service prefix for dynamic allocation of personal conference.
!"
Up to double bandwidth capacity on IP only, non encrypted calls.
!"
Support for participant identification in video, with localizations support (Chinese, Traditional Chinese, Thai, Japanese, Korean and
Russian).
!"
Encoding support for High Definition Continous Precence resolution.
!"
Optimal Voice Switch - Video switching, providing point-to-point quality.
Options
Simplifies scheduling and the use of video meeting resources through highly automated functionality:
!"
Management using TANDBERG Management
Suite.
!"
Scheduling using TANDBERG Scheduler,
Microsoft® Outlook®, Microsoft® Office Communicator® or IBM Lotus Notes®
!"
Ad Hoc conferencing through Microsoft® Office Communicator®
TANDBERG MPS Capacity
The TANDBERG MPS 800 can support up to
!"
40 simultaneous conferences
!"
160 simultaneous video calls
!"
48 simultaneous telephone calls
!"
80 simultaneous Gateway calls
The TANDBERG MPS 200 can support up to
!"
10 simultaneous conferences
!"
40 simultaneous video calls
!"
32 simultaneous telephone calls
!"
20 simultaneous Gateway calls
TANDBERG MPS Capacity on IP
The maximum bandwidth on IP for each Media
Processing Board is 15360 kbps. With 8 Media
Processing Boards installed in a MPS 800 the maximum bandwidth on IP is 122800 kbps.
Setting Encryption to On will decrease the maximum bandwidth throughput, but not the total number of ports. The maximum bandwidth for each of the Media Processing Boards is 7680 kbps with Encryption set to On in all calls.
NOTE: Encrypted SIP calls is a Beta feature, and you should not run with Encrypted SIP calls in a production environment, it has limited support and is for evaluation and testing use only.
TANDBERG MPS Capacity on ISDN
The maximum bandwidth for ISDN for each Media Processing Board is 7680 kbps. With 4 E1/
T1 ISDN Interface Card installed in a MPS 800, and 8 Media Processing Boards the maximum bandwidth is 61440 kbps.
One V.35 Serial Interface Card could handle maximum 61440 kbps in maximum 32 calls.
More V.35 Serial Interface Card would increase, not the bandwidth capacity, but the number of possible calls up to a maximum of 128 calls.
The Gateway capacity is 7680 kbps per Media.
!
In a secure conference, there is no support for telephone participants.
To increase the capacity, the MCU can be connected in a cascade. See Appendices > Appendices > Distributed MCUs for details.
TF - TANDBERG First
16
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
TANDBERG MPS at a Glance
Rack Mountable Chassis
The TANDBERG MPS chassis is 19” rack-mountable.
!"
On the front of the chassis is a Liquid Crystal
Display (LCD) for initial configuration and basic system information.
!"
There are four Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) indicating the power status.
!"
The backplane of the chassis is provided with advanced CompactPCI technology for high speed communication between the boards.
!"
There are three cooling fans in the lower front of the chassis.
!"
The
TANDBERG MPS 800
has a 9U-19” rack-mountable chassis that can host up to 8 Media Processing Boards and up to 4
Network Interface Cards.
!"
The
TANDBERG MPS 200
has 3U-19” rackmountable chassis that can host up to 2 Media Processing Boards and up to 2 Network
Interface Cards.
System Controller Board - Front view
The System Controller Board is installed in the first slot in the chassis.
!"
In the MPS 800 the first slot is the first from the left of the chassis.
!"
In the MPS 200 the first slot is the first from the bottom of the chassis.
!
It is very important that the System Controller Board is installed in the first slot in the chassis! Installing in any other slot can damage the System Controller
Board.
The System Controller Board takes care of the following functions:
!"
Call control
!"
System management
!"
The embedded Web server
The System Controller Board is equipped with the following interfaces:
!"
1 X LAN / Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbit on the front.
!"
2 X LAN / Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbit on the back (only 1 in use, Enet2)
!"
1 x COM port on the front
!"
2 X USB port (these are for future use)
Diodes (LEDs) for board status. With the TAND-
BERG MPS 800, there is support for up to 8
Media Processing Boards. With the TANDBERG
MPS 200, there is support for up to 2 Media Processing Boards. See the Appendices section for further details on the Media Processing Board.
The LAN interface on the System Controller
Board is for management/call control signalling.
Note that management is disabled on Enet2.
This interface is only for call control. The 2 LAN interfaces will allow you to connect to two nonoverlapping IP-networks so that participants with no IP-routing between them can be joined in the same conference. At least one Media Processing
Board must be connected to each network. The
2xLAN interfaces will give the TANDBERG MPS support for two Gatekeepers, one on each network. To use the COM1 port you need a RJ-45 to
RS-232 converter.
Power Units
The TANDBERG MPS 800 is shipped with 2 hot-swappable power units for configurations of 1 to 3 Media Processing Boards. If the unit has more than 3 Media Processing Boards the
TANDBERG MPS 800 has to be equipped with 3 hot-swappable power units. The power units are installed at the back of the chassis. You will also find the power switch/connector at the back of the chassis.
The TANDBERG MPS 200 is always shipped with 1 power unit integrated in the chassis.
System Controller Board - Rear View
The second LAN interface of the System Controller Board is accessible from the rear side.
See the Appendices section for further details on the System Controller Board.
Media Processing Board
Add-on boards for media processing are installed in adjacent slots in the chassis. The
Media Processing Boards handles the following functions:
!"
Video processing, see Video Features in the
Appendices section for details.
!"
Audio processing, see Audio > Create Conference in the Using the MPS section for details.
!"
Transcoding, see Transcoding and
Ratematching in the Appendices section for details.
!"
Encryption, see Secure Conference (Encryption) in the Appendices section for details.
!"
Continuous Presence/Voice Switching, see
Video Features in the Appendices section for details.
Each of the Media Processing Boards is equipped with 1xLAN interface for H.323 and
SIP media. You will also find 4 Light Emitting
Network Interface Cards
The Network Interface Cards of the TANDBERG
MPS are installed from the rear panel.
There are two types of Network Interface Cards:
!"
PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Card (IIC-8).
Each PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Card has 8 x
PRI interfaces.
!"
V.35 Serial Interface Card (SIC-32).
Each of the V.35 Serial Interface Card has 32 x V.35/RS366 ports.
There is support for up to 4 Network Interface
Cards.
There can be a mix of PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface
Cards and V.35 Serial Interface Cards.
The PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Card and the
V.35 Serial Interface Card may only be installed in slot 1-6. (1 being the first Media Processing
Board, left from the System Controller Card, seen from the rear).
See the Appendices section for further details of the different Network Interface Cards.
17
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction
This section describes the first time installation of the MPS - Media Processing System.
The section covers unpacking, what’s in the box, mounting the MPS, cable connections, starting up the system and initial IP configuration using LCD. You will also find pictures of the MPS 800 and MPS 200 with a description of the interfaces.
The Quick Setup will help you get your MPS online and operational quickly. It provides a step-by-step guide to the basic H.323 services setup via the MPS web interface.
Stay up-to-date
We recommend you visit the TANDBERG web site regularly for an updated version of this guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Chapter 2
Getting started
In this chapter...
Precautions, Unpacking and Mounting
MPS 200 with 2 Media Processing Boards
MPS 200 with ISDN and V.35 Network Cards
MPS 800 with 8 Media Processing Cards
MPS 800 with ISDN and V.35 Network Cards
18
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Precautions, Unpacking and Mounting
Precautions
!"
Never install communication equipment during a lightning storm.
!"
Never install jacks for communication cables in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations.
!"
Never touch un-installed communication wires or terminals unless the communication line has been disconnected at the network interface.
!"
Use caution when installing or modifying communication lines.
!"
Avoid using communication equipment (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electrical shock from lightning.
!"
Do not use communication equipment to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
!"
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
!"
Never install cables without first switching the power OFF.
!"
This product complies with directives: LVD 73/23/EC and EMC
89/366/EEC.
!"
Caution - Double pole fusing.
!"
Power must be switched off before power supplies can be removed from or installed into the unit.
Unpacking
To avoid damage to the unit during transportation, the TANDBERG
MPS is delivered in a special shipping box.
The shipping box contains the following components:
1.
Chassis: a.
MPS 200, a 3U chassis with power supply.
b. or MPS 800, a 9U chassis with 2 or 3 x Power Units
(depending on the number of Media Processing Boards installed) c.
1 x System Controller Board d.
The Media Processing Boards ordered e.
PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Card (if ordered) f.
V.35 Serial Interface Card (if ordered)
2.
Administrator Guide and other documentation on CD
3.
Installation sheets
4.
4 screws and 4 nuts for rack mounting and 4 pads
5.
Cables: a.
Power cable b.
Ethernet cables c.
ISDN cables (optional) d.
V.35 kit (optional). The kit includes cables that convert from high-density connectors on V.35 card to TANDBERG’s standard V.35 connectors (26pin DSUB) and 19” rackmountable panel where the V.35 connectors will fit.
e.
RJ45 to RS-232 converter cable
Preparations on Site
The mounting space must be prepared before you start:
!"
Make sure the TANDBERG MPS is accessible and that all cables can be easily connected
!"
For ventilation: Leave a space of at least 10cm (4 inches) behind the TANDBERG MPS’s rear panel and 10cm (4 inches) in front of the front panel
!"
The room in which you install the TANDBERG MPS should have an ambient temperature between 0ºC and 35ºC (32ºF and
95ºF) and between 10% and 90% non-condensing relative humidity
!"
Do not place heavy objects directly on top of the TANDBERG
MPS
!"
Do not place hot objects directly on top, or directly beneath the
TANDBERG MPS
!"
Use a grounded AC power outlet for the TANDBERG MPS.
Mounting the MPS on a Rack
The TANDBERG MPS comes with 4 screws and 4 nuts for mounting in standard 19” racks. The chassis is equipped with brackets.
1.
Before starting the rack mounting, please make sure the TAND-
BERG MPS is placed securely on a hard, flat surface.
2.
Disconnect the AC power cable.
3.
Make sure that the mounting space is according to the
Preparations on Site in the section above.
4.
Insert the chassis into a 19” rack, and secure with screws in the front (four screws) and nuts (four nuts).
19
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Contents
System overview
MPS 200 with 2 Media Processing Boards
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Brackets for
Rack Mounting
Screw holes for
Rack Mounting
Use Arrow keys to navigate in the menu Display Enter/OK key
Media Processing
Boards
System Controller
Board (in slot 1)
LEDs for power status
10/100
BASE T
USB 0
USB 1
PCI Mezzanine Card
Ethernet
COM1
LEDs for the media board
RESET button
LEDs for CPU and FAILURE
20
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Contents
System overview,
cont...
MPS 200 with ISDN and V.35 Network Cards
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
RS232
LEDs for
E1/T1
Line 1-8
E1/T1
Lines 1-8
V.35
Lines 1-32
Bracket for Rack
Mounting (in front)
Voltage / Frequency
Information
Power Switch On/Off
AC Power Inlet
Serial 3/4
ENET 1
ENET 2
COM1
PMC I/O
Module
KB/MS
System
Controller
Board
V.35
Serial
Interface
(slot 1)
Card
PRI E1/
T1 ISDN
Network
Interface
Card
21
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Contents
System overview,
cont...
MPS 800 with 8 Media Processing Cards
Use Arrow keys to navigate in the menu
Using the MPS
Display Enter/OK key
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
LEDs for power status
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Screw holes for
Rack Mounting
Screw holes for
Rack Mounting
10/100 BASE T
USB 0, USB 1
PCI Mezzanine Card
COM1
RESET button
LEDs for CPU and FAILURE
LEDs for the media board
Ethernet Connectors
System Controller
Board (in slot 1)
8 Media Processing
Boards
22
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Contents
System overview,
cont...
MPS 800 with ISDN and V.35 Network Cards
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
2 Power Supply units
(hot swappable)
Power Supply
LEDs
Power Switch
On/Off
AC Power Inlet
2 V.35 Serial
Interface Cards
2 PRI E1/T1 ISDN Network Interface Cards
System Controller
Board (slot 1)
Bracket for Rack
Mounting (in front)
*KB/MS (keyboard/mouse)
*PMC I/O Module
COM1
ENET 1
ENET 2
LEDs for E1/T1 Line 1-8
Serial 3/4
RS232 Serial
Interface
23
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction
Connecting cables
Power Cable
Connect the system power cable to an electrical distribution socket.
Using the MPS System status
Connecting Ethernet Cables
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
LAN Cables
Connect the LAN cable from the 10/100 BASE T connector on the front of the System Controller Board to your network.
From the
Ethernet
connector on the front of each of the Media Processing Boards, connect a LAN cable to your network.
NOTE: Use a switch/router and not a hub for connecting LAN cables between the TANDBERG MPS and the rest of your network
Connect to Two Separate IP Networks
If you want to connect the TANDBERG MPS to two separate
IP networks you must use the second ‘Enet2’ interface on the back of the System Controller Board, in addition to the
‘Enet1’ interface on the front side.
ISDN-PRI Cables
For each of the PRI interfaces, the E1/T1 cable should be connected to a CSU (Channel Service Unit). You will need a
CSU between the TANDBERG MPS and the PRI line from your network provider.
NOTE: Both Leased E1/T1 (G.703) and ISDN PRI uses the same physical interface on the ISDN Interface Card.
V.35 Cables
Connect the high-density connector on the V.35 card and insert the TANDBERG standard V.35 connectors (26pin DSUB) into the corresponding position in the 19” rack-mountable panel. Additional cables will be required for connection to customer provided device.
See the Appendices section for further details on the V.35 cables.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
!
Do not use a hub!
Use a switch/router and not a hub for connecting LAN cables between the TANDBERG MPS and the rest of your network.
24
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction
Starting up the system
Preparations
Before starting the TANDBERG MPS make sure the following has been done:
1.
The
System Controller Board
must be installed in the first slot in the chassis.
2.
Make sure the
Media Processing Board(s) and the Network Interface Card(s) are interted correctly into the chassis.
2.
MPS 800: Make sure the Power Unit(s) are inserted correctly into the back of the chassis.
3.
Connect the
Power Cable
.
Turning on the MPS
Set the Power Switch on the back of the chassis to 1 .
Startup mode
!"
On the front of the chassis you will see the
CPU LED on the System Controller Board flashing
!"
On the Media Processing Boards the Power
LED turns green.
!"
The Active LED is flashing green while software is being uploaded to the Media
Processing Boards.
!"
In the
LCD
(Liquid Crystal Display) you will see the logo.
The system is ready for configuration
1.
When both Power and Active LED’s on the
Media Processing Boards are steady green
2.
And the initial configuration menu appears on the LCD.
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
MPS200 Front Side MPS200 Back Side
Liquid Crystal
Display
Liquid Crystal
Display
Power LED
Active LED
CPU LED
MPS800 Front Side MPS800 Back Side
Power
Cable
Power
Switch
CPU LED
Power LED
Active LED
Power
Switch
Power
Cable
25
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction
The LCD interface
LCD - Liquid Crystal Display
The initial configuration is done through the
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the front of the chassis.
Status Page
Conf - number of active conferences
Part - number of active participants
IP SC Link - system controller ethernet link indicator
IP Media Link - media card ethernet link indicator
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Example of the LCD menu structure on a MPS having 1 System Controller Board and 2 Media Processing Boards:
Parameter Config
Parameter Info
LCD Settings
Restart
SC IP Config
Media IP Config
IP <
192.168.001.100>
SNM <
255.255.255.000>
GW <
192.168.001.001>
IF Speed <
100Full>
Media 1 IP Config
Media 2 IP Config
Conf: 0 Part: 0
IP SC Link: Up
IP Media Link: 2/2
SC IP Info IP <
192.168.100.101>
SNM <
255.255.255.000>
GW <
192.168.100.001>
IF Speed <
100Full>
Example with a MPS having 2 Media boards
Parameter Configuration
The initial configuration of the MPS needs to be done through the LCD. The initial configuration is done in the Parameter Config menus.
Parameter Info
The configuration can be viewed from the Parameter Info menu.
LCD Settings
The LCD can be configured to control the Contrast and Backlight.
Restart
Select Restart to restart the MPS.
Contrast: 128
Backlight: On
LCD buttons
Press
Arrow Up
to move up in the menu or to increase a digit (0 –> 9)
Press
Arrow Down
to move down in the menu or to decrease a digit (9 –> 0)
Press
Arrow Left
to step back in the menu or to move the next digit to the left
Press Arrow Right to step forward in the menu or to move the next digit to the right
Press Confirm button to confirm a selection
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
IP <
192.168.001.200>
SNM <
255.255.255.000>
GW <
192.168.001.001>
IF Speed <
100Full>
IP <
192.168.001.300>
SNM <
255.255.255.000>
GW <
192.168.001.001>
IF Speed <
100Full>
IF Speed <
Auto/10Half/10F ull/100Half/100Full>
!
!
Take care!
When changing a value it is automatically saved.
If Contrast is set to a very low or a very high value the display will become black.
Restart To activate changes to the Parameter
Config the MPS requires a restart.
26
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Using the MPS System status
System Controller Board
Initial Configuration
LCD
Before using the TANDBERG MPS it requires some basic configuration. This is done through the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the front of the chassis.
Parameter Configuration
"
!"
Press any key to open the main menu.
!"
Use
Arrow
buttons to select from the submenu and press the
Confirm
button.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
#
Use Arrow buttons to select SC IP Config and press the
Confirm
button.
$
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Use
Arrow
buttons to select a line and set the three addresses and the Ethernet speed. Use
Arrow Left
to step back in the menu.
Static Network Addresses
Follow the instructions, to the right, to configure static network addresses and Ethernet speed of the System Controller Board (SC) and Media
Processing Board.
Access to the MPS
After configuring the IP-address of the System
Controller Board (and restart the MPS), you may continue the configuration from the web interface. You have access to the TANDBERG
MPS by entering the IP-address of the System
Controller Board in a standard Web-browser.
Enter Password
You will be asked to enter a password. Some
Web-browsers requires a User Name to be entered. Could be such as ‘admin’. The default password for the TANDBERG MPS is “TAND-
BERG”. The password is case sensitive.
Change Password
To change the password of the system, you will need to log on to the MPS using a command line interface. For further information see the
TANDBERG MPS API guide. Go to: http://www.
tandberg.com/docs .
Parameter Config
Parameter Info
LCD Settings
Restart
Parameter Config - Configuration of System
Controller Board(s) and Media Processing
Board(s).
Parameter Info
- See the configuration of the System Controller Board(s) and Media
Processing Board(s).
LCD Settings
Restart
- Configuration of the LCD.
- Restart the MPS
SC IP Config
SC IP Config
Media IP Config
- Configuration of the System
Controller Board.
LCD buttons
Press
Arrow Up
to move up in the menu or to increase a digit (0 –> 9)
Press
Arrow Down
to move down in the menu or to decrease a digit (9 –> 0)
Press
Arrow Left
to step back in the menu or to move the next digit to the left
Press Arrow Right to step forward in the menu or to move the next digit to the right
Press Confirm button to confirm a selection
IP <
192.168.001.100>
SNM <
255.255.255.000>
GW <
192.168.001.001>
IF Speed <
100Full>
IP : Defines the static IP address of the System
Controller Board: Example <
192.168.001.100>
SNM : Defines the static IP Subnet Mask for the network: Example <
255.255.255.000>
GW
: Defines the static IP Gateway address:
Example <
192.168.001.001>
IF Speed
: Defines the Ethernet speed: <
Auto/
10Half/10Full/100Half/100Full>
!
Restart the TANDBERG MPS
To activate changes to the Parameter Configuration the
MPS requires a restart.
!"
Use
Arrow Left
to step back to the main menu and select Restart
27
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Using the MPS System status
Media Processing Board
Initial Configuration
LCD
Before using the TANDBERG MPS it requires some basic configuration. This is done through the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) on the front of the chassis.
Parameter Configuration
"
!"
Press any key to open the main menu.
!"
Use
Arrow
buttons to select from the submenu and press the
Confirm
button.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
#
Use Arrow buttons to select Media IP Config and press the
Confirm
button.
$
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Use
Arrow
buttons to select a line and set the three addresses and the Ethernet speed. Use
Arrow Left
to step back in the menu.
Static Network Addresses
Follow the instructions, to the right, to configure static network addresses and Ethernet speed of the Media Processing Board.
Access to the MPS
After configuring the IP-address of the System
Controller Board (and restart the MPS), you may continue the configuration from the web interface. You have access to the TANDBERG
MPS by entering the IP-address of the System
Controller Board in a standard Web-browser.
Enter Password
You will be asked to enter a password. Some
Web-browsers requires a User Name to be entered. Could be such as ‘admin’. The default password for the TANDBERG MPS is “TAND-
BERG”. The password is case sensitive.
Change Password
To change the password of the system, you will need to log on to the MPS using a command line interface. For further information see the
TANDBERG MPS API guide. Go to: http://www.
tandberg.com/docs .
Parameter Config
Parameter Info
LCD Settings
Restart
Parameter Config
- Configuration of System
Controller Board(s) and Media Processing
Board(s).
Parameter Info - See the configuration of the System Controller Board(s) and Media
Processing Board(s).
LCD Settings
Restart
- Configuration of the LCD.
- Restart the MPS
SC IP Config
Media IP Config
Media IP Config
- Configuration of the Media
Processing Board (MPS 200 having 1-2 boards and MPS 800 having 1-8 boards).
If more than one Media board the menu will be extended with the number of boards installed.
Use Arrow buttons to select the desired board and continue the configuration.
Media 1 IP Config
Media 2 IP Config
LCD buttons
Press
Arrow Up
to move up in the menu or to increase a digit (0 –> 9)
Press
Arrow Down
to move down in the menu or to decrease a digit (9 –> 0)
Press
Arrow Left
to step back in the menu or to move the next digit to the left
Press Arrow Right to step forward in the menu or to move the next digit to the right
Press Confirm button to confirm a selection
!
IP <
192.168.001.200>
SNM <
255.255.255.000>
GW <
192.168.001.001>
IF Speed <
100Full>
IP
: Defines the static IP address of the Media Processing Board: Example
<
192.168.001.200>
SNM : Defines the static IP Subnet Mask for the network: Example <
255.255.255.000>
GW : Defines the static IP Gateway address:
Example <
192.168.001.001>
IF Speed : Defines the Ethernet speed: <
Auto/
10Half/10Full/100Half/100Full>
Restart the TANDBERG MPS
To activate changes to the Parameter Configuration the
MPS requires a restart.
!"
Use
Arrow Left
to step back to the main menu and select Restart
28
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction
The web interface
The TANDBERG MPS is normally controlled via the web interface, but any authorized user may schedule meetings on the TANDBERG MPS by using the TANDBERG Management Suite (TMS) or the TANDBERG Scheduler.
In this guide we will describe how to use the web interface of the TANDBERG MPS.
The TANDBERG MPS consists of the Multipoint
Control Unit (MCU), and may also include optional Gateway (GW) functionality.
Note that the Gateway Configuration tab on the web interface is only visible when the Gateway option is installed.
SSH and Telnet
The TANDBERG MPS can also be controlled via
SSH or Telnet by using a comprehensive set of
API commands. This enables the TANDBERG
MPS to be controlled by a different user interface, such as an AMX or Crestron control systems.
For the web interface of the TANDBERG MPS to work properly, make sure you have set the permission to ‘Allow Scripting’ in the Security Settings in the Web browser.
Using the MPS System status
"
IP address of the MPS.
You can use either +&&G or +&&G-, with +&&G- recommended for administrative access.
The +&&G settings can be configured after the first login.
Go to: System Configuration >
Miscellaneous.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
# name
admin and password,
TANDBERG (default password).
Overview
The Overview page lets you see information about all conferences currently active on the TANDBERG
MPS.
MCU
!"
Shows all MCU conferences
GW*
!"
Shows all Gateway calls.
Phone Book
Use Phone Book to:
!"
Add new entry
!"
Edit existing entry
!"
Add up to 250 single entries
!"
Add up to 16 group entries.
System Status
Gives an overview of:
!"
H.320 Status
!"
PRI Status
!"
G.703 Status
!"
V.35 Status
!"
Media Board Information
!"
H.323 Status
!"
SIP Status
!"
System Information
System Config.
Lets you configure:
!"
H.320
!"
PRI
!"
G.703
!"
IP
!"
Media Board
!"
Serial V.35
!"
H.323
!"
SNMP
!"
SIP
!"
QoS
!"
Miscellaneous
!"
Upgrade
!"
Language
!"
XML
!"
Certificate Mgmt
$
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us you will see all conferences currently active on the TANDBERG MPS.
Gateway Config.*
Lets you configure:
!"
Dialling Rules
!"
Settings
!"
Files
MCU Configuration
Lets you configure:
!"
Dial In Numbers
!"
Network Profile
!"
Conference Template
!"
Files
* Visible only when a Gateway is installed
Read about the API commands in the
TANDBERG MPS API Guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs .
29
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction
Quick setup
5'/-&67&89&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Configuration of the MPS using Web Interface
Open a web browser and type in the IP address to access the web interface. The IP address to enter was configured from the LCD during the installation process.
Configuration of the System Controller Board
Navigate to System Configuration > IP:
!"
Verify the
IP Address
set via the front panel LCD.
!"
If applicable, set the IP Address of Interface 2 .
As a minimum you must configure Interface
1. If your TANDBERG MPS is connected to two different IP networks, you must configure both
Interface 1 and Interface 2.
For further information, go to:
System Configuration > IP Configuration .
"
#
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Configuration of the Media Board(s)
Navigate to System Configuration > Media Board IP:
!"
Make sure to select the correct
Network ID
.
When using only 1 IP network all Media Boards should be set to Network ID 1.
!"
Set the
IP Address
for each of the installed Media
Boards.
For further information, go to:
System Configuration > Media Board IP .
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
30
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction
Quick setup,
cont...
5'/-&=7&>4?=?&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Configuration of the MPS using Web Interface
Open a web browser and type in the IP address to access the web interface. The IP address to enter was configured from the LCD during the installation process.
Registration to a Gatekeeper
Navigate to System Configuration > H.323:
!"
Set the
Gatekeeper
mode to Gatekeeper to enable the system to register to a Gatekeeper.
!"
Enter the Gatekeeper IP Address .
When registered, the H.323 Gatekeeper Status shows Registered, displays the Gatekeeper’s
IP address and the port used.
Problems with registration will be shown as
Registering and a Red alarm on the Conference
Overview page.
For further information, go to:
System Configuration > H.323 Configuration
.
$
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
31
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction
Quick setup,
cont...
5'/-&?7&9@8&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Configuration of the MPS using Web Interface
Open a web browser and type in the IP address to access the web interface. The IP address to enter was configured from the LCD during the installation process.
Simple PRI Configuration
Navigate to System Configuration > PRI:
!"
Set
Switch Type
by selecting the apropriate PRI protocol: National ISDN, AT&T Custom ISDN, ETSI
(Euro ISDN) or Japan/Taiwan ISDN.
All PRI lines on the same E1/T1 Interface Card must use the same PRI Protocol.
!"
If same number for all PRI’s set
Trunk Groups
to
On.
!"
Configure PRI Numbers in Number Range Start and
Number Range Stop
.
For further information, go to:
System Configuration > PRI Board Configuration
.
!
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
32
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction
Quick setup,
cont...
5'/-&A7&B(!"&8*&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Configuration of the MPS using Web Interface
Open a web browser and type in the IP address to access the web interface. The IP address to enter was configured from the LCD during the installation process.
Dial In Configuration
Navigate to MCU Configuration > Dial In Numbers:
Configure one or more of the following numbers and aliases to enable the MPS to know which conference number to dial into.
!"
ISDN Number.
The ISDN number must be a valid
PRI number of the TANDBERG MPS at hand.
!"
E.164 Alias.
The H.323 E.164 numeric alias for each conference.
The Single Dial In Number allows the MPS to set up multiple conferences, in an Ad Hoc manner by the user dialling in to a single number.
You may configure and create different types of conferences. For further information, go to:
MCU Configuration > Dial In Numbers
.
%
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
33
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
The Using the MPS section will help you understand how to use the MCU, Gateway and Phone
Book. It provides a step-by-step guide to the basics as well as a description of each setting available from the web interface.
Stay up-to-date
We recommend you visit the TANDBERG web site regularly for an updated version of this guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Chapter 3
Using the MPS
In this chapter...
The
Conference Configuration, Video, Layouts, Video,
Audio, Security, Participants and Network settings
Conference Status, Add Participants, Examples,
Edit Conference Configuration, Dial-In Configura-
tion, The Basic tab, The Advanced tab, The Termi-
Gateway Features, Gateway Capacity, Gateway Us-
age Information, Gateway Calls Overview, Discon-
nect a Gateway call, Transfer a Gateway call
My Contacts, Add New Entry, My Contacts, Edit
34
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
MCU Overview, Usage Information
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
The Usage pane for MCU calls shows the current status of all the available resources (Video,
Telephone, ISDN Channels and Total Bandwidth).
Right above the Usage pane you can:
!"
Set Auto-Refresh to
On/Off
!"
Adjust the Refresh Rate (2-30 seconds)
!"
For a quick refresh click the Refresh button.
The General field displays some basic information:
!"
Software version
!"
IP address(es)
!"
Gatekeeper address and status
!"
SIP status
The Status field displays the connections status for the installed boards and cards:
!"
Media boards
!"
ISDN PRI card
!"
ISDN G.703 card
!"
SERIAL card
The status of the MCU resources:
!"
Telephone Calls 0 of 32: indicate that 0 telephone calls are connected to the MCU. The total number of supported telephone calls in this configuration is 32.
!"
Video Calls 0 of 40: indicate that 0 video calls are connected to the TANDBERG MPS. The total number of supported video calls in this configuration is maximum 40.
!"
ISDN Channels 0 of 45: indicate that 0 ISDN channels are used on the TANDBERG MPS.
The total number of supported ISDN channels in this configuration is 45.
!"
Total Bandwidth 0 of 43200: indicate that 0 kbps bandwidth is used on the TANDBERG
MPS. The maximum bandwidth available in this configuration is 43200 kbps.
!"
Conferences 0 of 15: indicate that there are up to 15 available conferences on this TAND-
BERG MPS, and that 0 of them are currently in use.
Indicates OK
Indicates a warning
Indicates an error
Click
More
to see more details.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
35
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
MCU Conference Overview
Filter Conference Overview
!"
Active
If selected all the active conferences are shown
!"
Inactive
If selected all the inactive conferences are shown
!"
Dynamic
If selected all the Ad Hoc created conferences are shown
Search
View a specific conference selected by name using the Name search field.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Create a Conference
1.
Click on the
Conference#: Create
New drop down list to select a conference and press
OK
button to create a new conference.
2.
Click on the
Create New Conference button to create a new conference.
3.
Click on
[Create]
in the conference list to set up a new conference.
Password For privacy, a conference can be password protected.
Indicates that a valid password is required for all participants dialling in to the conference.
Indicates that the conference is not password protected.
Conference Status
When a conference is active click on the corresponding conference name or number to see conference status in details. It is possible to change the conference name.
Videos
Shows the number of connected video sites and the maximum number of allowed video sites in the conference.
Telephones
Shows the number of connected telephones and the maximum number of allowed telephones in the conference.
ISDN Channels
Shows the total number of ISDN channels used in the conference.
Duration
IP Bandwidth
Shows the total IP bandwidth used in the conference.
Shows the call duration of the conference.
Allow Incoming Calls
!"
Yes Participants can dial in to the conference.
!"
No Incoming calls are not allowed. The MCU must dial out to all participants.
Encryption (Secure Conference
TF
) The MCU supports Secure Conference DES and AES.
Indicates that DES (56 bit) encryption is used.
Indicates that AES (128 bit) encryption is used.
Indicates that the conference is not encrypted.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
36
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Create a conference on the MCU
Select the
Overview
tab and
MCU
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Create a new conference
1.
Click on
[Create]
in the conference list to set up a new conference.
2. or: click on the
Create New Conference button to create a new conference.
3. or: click on the Conference#: Create
New
drop down list to select a conference and press OK button to create a new conference.
Create a Conference
Click on [Create] in the conference list to create a new conference.
Create Conference 1
All settings on the
Create Conference #
view will be explained in detail on the following pages.
37
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Create conference
:#*0/1/*)/&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Name
The conference name will be shown on the Conference Overview
page and on the
Conference Status
page.
Maximum Conference Rate
Custom Selection:
Specifiy the maximum possible call rate allowed in the conference. If a participant does not support this rate the MCU will connect at the highest rate possible.
Telephone:
When Telephone is selected, an audio bridge will be created and no video participants will be able to join.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Default IP Net ID
Specifies which IP-network ID to use as default.
Restrict (56K)
Non-restricted and restricted calls are supported in the same conference. It is thus possible to select restrict for each call individually when dialling.
On:
Set Restrict (56K) to On to make the MCU to set up restricted calls by default.
Off:
Set Restrict (56K) to Off to make the MCU to set up nonrestricted call and down-speed to 56 kbps if necessary.
Allow Incoming Calls
On: Set to On to allow incoming calls. Incoming call will be automatically answered.
Off: Set to Off to automatically reject all incoming calls.
Cascading Mode
Used to join two or more conferences together.
Auto: Set to Auto to automatically determine which conference is ‘master’ and which conference(s) are ‘slave’. The ‘master’ conference will have control over the video layout. When left in ‘Auto’ mode, the conference dialling in to the other conferences, will become the ‘master’.
Master: Set to Master when this conference is the one controlling the video layout for the whole conference. It is not recommended to have more than one
‘master’ in a conference.
Slave:
Set to Slave when another conference manually has been assigned ‘master’. The slave will be forced to Full Screen voice switched mode.
Create Only
Select Create Only to create a conference, with the above-specified configuration, without dialling out to any participants.
The conference is then ready to start from the Conference Overview
with the comment [Inactive].
Add Participants
Select Add Participants to add participants or to manually dial a participant.
Cancel
Select
Cancel
to discard all changes and return to the Conference Overview
page.
Use Template
Predefined conference configurations can be used by selecting one of the 10 predefined Conference templates in the Create Conference pane.
The Conference Template 1 is default.
All settings can be manually edited by an authorized user.
38
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Create conference,
cont...
:#*0/1/*)/&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Maximum Call Duration
Determines the maximum duration (minutes) of the conference.
!"
All sites will be disconnected when the specified ‘Max Call
Duration’ has been reached.
!"
10 minutes, five minutes and one minute prior to this, a warning will be displayed to all the video participants in the conference, indicating the remaining time.
!"
The conference will remain active, after having timed out, allowing sites to dial in again and restart the conference timer.
!"
The conference administrator can extend the time.
!"
The timer for the max call duration will not begin until the first participant is connected.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Legacy Level
When connecting older videoconferencing endpoints to the
MCU, problems can occur since older equipment sometimes do not handle modern capabilities.
!"
It is possible to disable Dual Stream Switching setting the
Legacy Level to a value of 1-15.
!"
When set to 0-7: All capabilities are sent from the MCU
!"
When set to 8-14: The H.264 capability is disabled.
!"
When set to 15: The only capabilities sent for level 15 are
H.261, G.711 and G.722.
Floor to Full Screen
On: When set to On, the participant requesting the floor will be shown in full screen to all the other video participants, regardless of current speaker. The same will happen if the conference administrator assign floor to a site.
Off: When set to Off, the participant requesting the floor will be shown in the largest sub-picture if there is one in the selected layout.
Billing Code
When defining a conference, a specific billing code can be assigned to the conference.
All calls in this conference will be associated with this billing code. This will allow management tools, such as the TANDBERG Management Suite, to use the code for billing purposes.
Create Only
Select Create Only to create a conference, with the above-specified configuration, without dialling out to any participants.
The conference is then ready to start from the Conference Overview
with the comment [Inactive].
Add Participants
Select Add Participants to add participants or to manually dial a participant.
Cancel
Select
Cancel
to discard all changes and return to the Conference Overview
page.
Use Template
Predefined conference configurations can be used by selecting one of the 10 predefined Conference templates in the Create Conference pane.
The Conference Template 1 is default.
All settings can be manually edited by an authorized user.
39
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Create conference,
cont...
Video, Conference Layout
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Voice Switched 2 Split
2 Split Top-Bottom
3 Split
4 Split 4 + 3 Split
5 + 1 Split
7 + 1 Split 9 Split 8 + 2 Split
Top-Bottom
8 + 2 Split
Bottom-Top
8 + 2 Split
Top
Conference Layout
Auto: When set to Auto the most suitable conference layout will automatically be selected depending on the total number of participants in the actual conference.
Voice Switched:
Full Screen voice switched will show the current speaker in full screen to all the other participants, regardless of how many participants there are in the conference. Current speaker will see the previous speaker.
Custom Selection: Select a specific Conference Layout for the conference. The different selections are illustrated to the right.
CP Auto: When set to CP Auto there will be a dynamic change in layout dependent on the number of sites in the conferense. The
CP Auto will start with VS->CP4->CP9->CP16.
Show Current Speaker
The screen will be split into a specified number of sub-pictures.
The currently speaking participant will be shown in the largest sub-picture in asymmetric layouts. With fewer participants than the total number of sub-pictures, the empty sub-pictures will be black. If there are more participants than the total number of subpictures, only the last speakers will be displayed.
8 + 2 Split
Bottom
2 + 1 Split Wide
4 + 1 Split Wide
12 + 1 Split
Center
3 Split Wide
6 Split Wide
12 + 1 Split
Top Left
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
12 + 2 Split
3 + 1 Split Wide
8 + 1 Split Wide
16 Split 30 + 2 Split
4 Split Wide
12 Split Wide
40
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Create conference,
cont...
Video settings
CP Autoswitching
The CP Autoswitching enables you to swap non speaking sites with the least active sites in the picture. This lets you see all participants in a conference, even if they are not speaking.
CP Autoswitching can be set to a value between
0 seconds
(default) and 60 seconds . The number of seconds denotes how long each of the remaining participants shall be displayed on the screen.
If set to
0 seconds the CP Autoswitching will be disabled.
Note that the CP Autoswitching will be performed in the least active sub picture if one or more of the participants speak.
Video Format
Defines the video format for Continuous Presence (CP) mode.
Auto (Best Impression
TF
) In Continuous Presence mode the
MPS will select Motion (CIF) if the call rate is below 256 kbps and sending 4:3 aspect ratio. When sending 16:9 aspect ratio the MPS will select Motion (w288p) if the call rate is below
512 kbps. At call rates of 256 kbps and higher the MPS will select Sharpness (4CIF) when sending 4:3 aspect ratio. When sending 16:9 aspect ratio the MPS will select Sharpness
(w576p) at call rates of 512 kbps and higher.
Motion:
Set to Motion to prioritize motion and show up to 30 fps in CIF resolution and transmit the highest common format, preferably H.264 CIF when sending 4:3 aspect ratio or H.263+ w288p when sending 16:9 aspect ratio.
Sharpness: Set to Sharpness to prioritize crisp and clear picture and transmit the highest common format, preferably
H.263+ 4CIF when sending 4:3 aspect ratio or H.263+ w576p when sending 16:9 aspect ratio.
In Full Screen Voice Switched Conference layout, the MCU will prioritize H.264 CIF as the highest common format.
Video Custom Formats
On: Set to On to support custom formats, such as SIF and VGA resolutions. It allows true resolution to be maintained, rather than being scaled to another format. This is of particular benefit to users of NTSC and VGA resolutions, ensuring that their images are not scaled to fit with the PAL standard.
Off: Set to Off when support for custom formats are not needed.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Create Only
Select
Create Only
to create a conference, with the above-specified configuration, without dialling out to any participants.
Add Participants
Select
Add Participants
to add participants or to manually dial a participant.
Cancel
Select
Cancel
to discard all changes and return to the Conference Overview
page.
41
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Create conference,
cont...
Video settings
Dual Video Stream
The MCU supports DuoVideo
TF
, H.239 and BFCP.
On: Set to On to enable a Dual Video Stream protocol for this conference. Both DuoVideo
TF
and H.239 or BFCP are supported in the same conference.
Off:
When set to Off, Dual Video Stream will not be supported in this conference.
Conference Selfview
On:
Set to On to enable Conference Selfview. The users will see themself in the picture when more than one participant is in the conference.
Off: Set to Off to disable Conference Selfview.
Telephone Indication
On: Set to On to enable a Telephone Indicator to be displayed when there are telephone (audio only) participants connected to the conference. When the telephone participant is speaking the indicator will be outlined.
Off:
Set to Off to disable the Telephone Indicator to be displayed.
Speaker Indication
On: Set to On to enable a Speaker Indicator, a coloured line, to be displayed around the sub-picture that will indicate who is the currently speaking participant.
Off:
Set to Off to disable the coloured line to be displayed.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Lecture Mode
On:
Set to On to enable the Lecturer to be displayed in full screen to the other participants.
!"
The Lecturer is the participant which is assigned floor.
!"
The Lecturer will see a scan of all the participants in a full screen view or one of the supported sub-picture views. To enable the scan of other sites the CP Autoswitching must be set.
Off: Set to Off to disable the Lecturer, the participant which is assigned floor, to be view in full screen.
Create Only
Select
Create Only
to create a conference, with the above-specified configuration, without dialling out to any participants.
Add Participants
Select
Add Participants
to add participants or to manually dial a participant.
Cancel
Select
Cancel
to discard all changes and return to the Conference Overview page.
42
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Create conference,
cont...
Video settings
Participant Identifier
Auto: Set to Auto to let the System Name of a participant to be displayed the number of seconds set in Participant Identifier
Timeout.
On:
Set to On to enable the System Name for each participant to be displayed in the picture during the conference.
Off:
Set to Off to disable the System Name to be displayed.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Participant Identifier Timeout
Set the number of seconds (1 - 30 seconds) the Participant
Identifier will be visible, if set to auto. The identifier will reappear at every picture changing event.
Chair Control
On:
Set to On to enable Chair Control. The conference supports H.243 and BFCP Chair Control functionality initiated from the participants connected to the conference.
Off: Set to Off to disable Chair Control,
Minimum Bandwidth Threshold
If a participant calls in with a lower bandwidth than the Minimum Bandwidth Threshold, the participant will receive audio only (not live video) as well as a poster saying the bandwidth is to too low. After 10 seconds the participant will receive low rate video.
!"
The Minimum Bandwidth Threshold can be modified during a conference.
!"
The system will move calls below the defined Minimum
Bandwidth Threshold to a low rate encoder.
NOTE: Once a participant is moved to the low rate encoder, they will not be moved back even if the Minimum Bandwidth
Threshold is lowered.
Create Only
Select Create Only to create a conference, with the above-specified configuration, without dialling out to any participants.
Add Participants
Select Add Participants to add participants or to manually dial a participant.
Cancel
Select Cancel to discard all changes and return to the
Conference Overview
page.
43
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Create conference,
cont...
Video settings
Optimal Voice Switch
On: Set to On to enable Optimal video format in Voice Switch mode, if the connected endpoints allows this.
Off:
When set to Off there will be normal transcoding when doing Voice switch.
!
1.
Optimal Voice Switch is only available on IP.
2.
Icons and text are not available when set to On.
Encoder Selection Policy
Best Bit Rate: Set to Best Bit Rate to make the MPS prioritize the video quality for sites based on bit rate.
The system will move participants with a Low Video Rate to a secondary encoder, if it is available. If no sites are moved, the system will move sites with Low Video Standard.
Best Video Standard: Set to Best Video Standard to make the
MPS prioritize sites based on video standard.
The system will move participants with a Low Video Standard to a secondary encoder, if it is available. If no sites are moved, the system will move sites with Low Video Rate.
Best Resolution:
Set to Best Resolution to make the MPS prioritize the video quality for sites based on resolution.
The system will move participants with a Low Resolution to a secondary encoder, if it is available. If no sites are moved, the system will move sites with low video rate.
Secondary Rate
On: Set to On to enable Secondary Rate. The conference will support two outgoing bandwidths if needed, in addition to the low rate video.
Off:
Set to Off to disable Secondary Rate.
Web Snapshots
The web snapshots are shown in the upper right corner of the web interface, and will show snapshots of the video from the participants and dual video stream. The snapshots are updated in accordance to the refresh rate (placed above the snapshot).
On: Set to On to enable Web Snapshots. When set to On the Conference Snapshot and Dual Video Stream Snapshot will show the video transmitted from the MCU to the participants.
Off:
When set to Off a picture will appear telling that the Web Snapshots are disabled.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Create Only
Select
Create Only
to create a conference, with the above-specified configuration, without dialling out to any participants.
Add Participants
Select
Add Participants
to add participants or to manually dial a participant.
Cancel
Select
Cancel
to discard all changes and return to the Conference Overview
page.
44
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Create conference,
cont...
Audio settings
Voice Switch Timeout
Defines the number of seconds between 1 and 10, a participant must speak before it gets the speaker indication and is shown as the speaker to the other endpoints.
A long timeout might be suitable in noisy environments and in conferences with many participants.
Audio Leveling (AGC)
Ensures that all participants will receive the same audio level from all other participants, regardless of the levels transmitted. AGC - Automatic Gain Control.
In most conferences, the participants will speak at different levels. As a result, some of the participants are harder to hear than others. The Audio Leveling corrects this problem by automatically increasing the microphone levels when “quiet” or “distant” people speak, and by decreasing the microphone levels when “louder” people speak.
On:
When set to On the MCU maintains the audio signal level at a fixed value by attenuating strong signals and amplifying weak signals. Very weak signals, i.e. noise alone, will not be amplified.
Off: Set to Off to disable Audio Leveling (AGC).
Telephone Noise Suppression
On:
Set to On to enable Telephone Noise Suppression. Attenuates the noise which normally is introduced when adding mobile phones to a conference. The background noise normally heard when the telephone participant is not speaking will be attenuated.
Off:
Set to Off to disable Telephone Noise Suppression.
Allow G.728
On:
The MCU supports high quality audio even on low call rate.
On low call rate the MCU will prioritize G.722.1. The video participants which do not support G.722.1 will receive low quality audio G.728 instead when Allow G.728 is set to On.
Off:
To ensure high quality audio on low call rate, set Allow
G.728 to Off. Then video participants which are not able to support G.722.1, will receive G.722 instead.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Far End Telephone Echo Suppression
Analog telephone lines, speaker phones and telephone headsets may all cause echo.
The Far End Telephone Echo Suppression function eliminates some or all of the experienced echo.
Off: Set to Off to disable Far End Telephone Echo Suppression.
Normal:
Set to Normal to remove weak echo.
High: Set to High to remove strong echo.
Cancel
Select
Cancel
to discard all changes and return to the Conference Overview
page.
45
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Create conference,
cont...
Security settings
Password
To ensure only authorized participants are able to join this conference you can set a password. Then the participants must enter the password to join this conference. The password can be numerical only.
!"
When dialling into a password protected conference, the participant is met with the ‘Password Enquiry’ screen and sound, asking the participant to enter a password. This can be performed via a menu generated by the videoconferencing system (H.243 Password) or via DTMF (telephone) tones.
!"
Until the correct password is entered, the participant will not be able to hear or see any of the other participants. After entering the correct password and confirming (typically by pressing ‘OK’ or the hash key), the participant will join the conference.
!"
Should the password be incorrect, the participant is met with the ‘Password Incorrect’ screen and after a few seconds, the ‘Password Enquiry’ screen and sound appear again. If the participant enters a wrong password three times, the participant will be disconnected.
!"
With no password entered in this field, participants can join the conference without entering a password
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Password Out
On: When set to On and dialling out from a password protected conference, the participant is met with the ‘Password Enquiry’ screen and sound, asking the participant to enter a password.
This setting can be used to ensure that only authorized participants are able to join the conference also when dialling out from the conference.
Off:
When set to Off no password is required when dialling out.
Create Only
Select
Create Only
to create a conference, with the above-specified configuration, without dialling out to any participants.
Add Participants
Select
Add Participants
to add participants or to manually dial a participant.
Cancel
Select
Cancel
to discard all changes and return to the Conference Overview page.
46
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Create conference,
cont...
Security settings
Encryption
On: When set to On all participants in the conference must support DES or AES encryption (available on all TANDBERG endpoints using software version B4.0 or later).
Participants not supporting encryption will be shown the
‘Encryption Required’ screen for 60 seconds before they are disconnected from the conference.
Off: When set to Off the conference is not encrypted.
!
In an encrypted conference, there is no support for telephone participants.
Encryption Mode
This settings only applies if Encryption is set to On (see above).
Auto:
Set to Auto to use the highest level of encryption available on each of the participants connected in the conference.
This means that there can be a mix of DES and AES encrypted connections in the same conference.
AES-128: Set to AES-128 to allow only participants with AES
128 bit encryption capabilities. Participants without this capability will not be able to join the conference.
DES:
Set to DES to allow only participants with DES 56 bit encryption capabilities. Participants without this capability will not be able to join the conference.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Protect
On:
When Protect mode is set to On:
1.
Only predefined Protected Numbers are allowed to join this conference.
2.
The Protected Numbers field will be shown, and Protected Numbers can be configured from the Dial In Configuration in the MCU Conference Overview page.
Off:
Set to Off to disable the Protect mode.
For further information on Protected Numbers, see
Dial In Configuration
in the
Manage an Ongoing Conference section in this book.
Create Only
Select
Create Only
to create a conference, with the above-specified configuration, without dialling out to any participants.
Add Participants
Select
Add Participants
to add participants or to manually dial a participant.
Cancel
Select
Cancel
to discard all changes and return to the Conference Overview page.
47
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Create conference,
cont...
Participants settings
Video Participant Limit
Defines the maximum number of Video Participants allowed in the conference and reserves the number of needed
Video Option ports for this conference.
Values: 0 - 40 for MPS 200 and 0 - 160 for MPS 800.
Telephone Participant Limit
Defines the maximum number of Telephone Participants allowed in the conference.
Values: 0 - 32 for MPS 200 and 0 - 48 for MPS 800.
Welcome Picture and Sound
On: When set to On a Welcome screen and audio message will be shown to each new participant of the conference.
Off: Set to Off to disable the Welcome screen and audio message.
Entry and Exit Tones
On:
When set to On a tone signal will be heard each time a participant is entering or leaving the conference.
Off:
Set to Off to disable the Entry and Exit Tones.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Timeout Participants from Call List
On:
When set to On all participants that have been disconnected from the conference will be cleared from the Call List within 2 minutes.
Off: Set to Off to disable the Timeout Participants from Call
List.
Create Only
Select
Create Only
to create a conference, with the above-specified configuration, without dialling out to any participants.
Add Participants
Select
Add Participants
to add participants or to manually dial a participant.
Cancel
Select
Cancel
to discard all changes and return to the Conference Overview page.
48
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Create conference,
cont...
Network settings
Bandwidth Management
Manual: Disables automatic regulations of sites to Low rate encoder, based on video rate reports.
Auto:
Enables automatic regulations of sites to Low rate encoder, based on video rate reports.
Network Error Handling
None: Set to None to not enable error handling.
IPLR: Set to IPLR (Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery) if one or more sites are experiencing network errors.
FURBlock: Set to FURBlock (Fast Update Request Block) if one or more sites are experiencing network errors.
The Network Error Handling may be set to IPLR (Intelligent
Packet Loss Recovery) or FURBlock (Fast Update Request
Block) if one or more sites are experiencing network errors.
IPLR Robust Mode
Auto:
When set to Auto, the IPLR Robust Mode is turned on for each encoder when needed.
On:
When set to On, the IPLR Robust Mode is on for all encoders.
Please refer to Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery (IPLR) in the
Appendices section.
FUR Block Sites
Auto:
When set to Auto, the FUR’s from sites that send too many will be blocked.
On:
When set to On, the FUR’s from all sites will be blocked.
FUR Filter Interval
Denotes the number of seconds between FUR’s, e.g. the minimum time between FURs that will refresh the picture.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Network
If a conference participant is experiencing poor network quality it will send Fast Update Requests (FUR) to the encoder in the MCU to make it refresh the picture. This can be observed as a short flash in the picture.
Poor network conditions for one participant may have a deteriorating effect on the video quality for some of the participants in the conference.
In an effort to reduce this effect the Network Error Handling can be used.
Create Only
Select Create Only to create a conference, with the above-specified configuration, without dialling out to any participants.
Add Participants
Select Add Participants to add participants or to manually dial a participant.
Cancel
Select Cancel to discard all changes and return to the
Conference Overview
page.
49
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Manage an active conference
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Frequently used numbers can be stored in the
Phone Book or a management system, e.g. TAND-
BERG Management Suite (TMS).
"
Click on a conference in the list to see the
Conference Status for this conference.
The Conference Status views are described in detail on the following pages.
#
Click on
MCU
to return to the Conference Overview .
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Auto Refresh: Check/uncheck the Auto
Refresh to put it On/Off.
Auto Refresh Rate: Select the desired
Refresh Rate for Auto Refresh.
Refresh:
Push the Refresh button to manually refresh the page.
Select:
Select a conference from the list and press the OK button to change the view to show the selected conference.
50
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU
Conference Status
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
Numbers
Shows the dial in number for the conference, on ISDN or IP.
Each conference has separate dial in numbers.
H.323 / SIP URI
Shows the dial in address for the conference, on H.323 or SIP.
Call Duration
Shows the call duration of the current conference.
If specified, the Maximum Call Duration for the conference, is also shown. The Maximum Call Duration is set when you Create Conference or in the
Conference Template Configuration
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Video Out
Shows the outgoing video rate, the video encoding algorithm and the resolution that is transmitted from the MCU to the participants.
Dual Video Stream Out
If one of the participants is transmitting DuoVideo
TF
/H.239/
BFCP, the outgoing Dual Video Stream rate, the Dual Video
Stream encoding algorithm and the resolution is shown here.
Participants not capable of receiving Dual Video Stream, will only receive the main video.
Conference Layout
Shows the selected conference layout. The following layouts are available:
Auto, Voice Switched, 2 Split, 3 Split, 4 Split, 4+3 Split, 5+1 Split, 7+1 Split, 8+2 Split Top-Bottom, 8+2 Split Bottom-
Top, 8+2 Split Top, 8+2 Split Bottom, 9 Split, 12+1 Split Center, 12+1 Split Top left, 12+2 Split, 16 Split, 30+2 Split,
2+1 Split Wide, 3 Split Wide, 3+1 Split Wide, 4+1 Split Wide, 6 Split Wide, 8+1 Split Wide, 12 Split Wide and CP Auto.
The
Conference Layout
can also be set when you Create Conference and in the Conference Template Configuration.
51
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
Conference Status
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
Encryption / Password
Encryption: Shows what type of encryption is allowed for the conference.
Password: Shows the key symbol if a dial in password has been assigned to the conference. If no key symbol is present, the conference is not password protected.
Participants
Video / Telephone
: Shows the current number of video and telephone participants in the conference and the maximum allowed.
In the example to the right there are 6 of 10 participants on video and 0 of 10 participants on audio.
Conference Mode
Stand Alone: This mode indicates that a normal conference is active.
Cascading Master: Indicates that this conference has become
Master when connecting to another MCU. If the <
Warning: Multiple masters, irregular behaviour expected>is seen, more than one conference has been forced to Master, which is not recommended.
Cascading Slave:
Indicates that this conference has become
Slave when connecting to another MCU
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Conference Snapshot
Conference Snapshot Shows a snapshot of the video transmitted from the MCU to the participants.
Click on the picture to enlarge it in a separate window.
!
In an encrypted conference, Conference Snapshots are not available.
Dual Video Stream Snapshot
Snapshot Shows a snapshot of the Dual Video Stream transmitted from the MCU to the participants.
Click on the picture to enlarge it in a separate window.
52
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
Add Participants
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
Add Participants
To add new participants to the conference, press the Add Participants button
. The
Call Participants window
will be shown.
Using the Phone Book
Select an entry from the phone book and press the Call Participants button to call the participant.
Search in Phone Book
Enter a name in the Find field to search for a name in the phone book.
Modify a Phone Book Entry
Use
Copy entry to Manual Dial
to modify an existing entry in the phone book.
Add Several Participants
To add several participants at the same time, select an entry from the phone book or fill in the manual dial area and press the
Add -->
button to add the participant to the Participant list.
Press the Call Participants button to call the participants.
Remove Participants from the Participants List
To remove a participant from the Participants List, select an entry from the list and press the
<-- Remove
button.
Using the Manual Dialling
If a participant is not listed in the phone book, use the Manual
Dial area and press the Call Participants button to call the participant.
The Manual Dialling is explained on the next page.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
53
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
Add Participants
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
Add Participants
To add new participants to the conference, press the
Add Participants button
. The
Call Participants window
will be shown.
Number
Enter the video number, telephone number or RS366 dial string.
For G.703 Leased Line calls, this is the call number (1 to 5).
Call Type
Select the call rate to be used.
Use Default (default) is the configured Maximum Conferense
Rate.
Custom Selection : Use Default, 1 x H.221, 2 x H.221, 64 kbps, 128 kbps, 192 kbps, 256 kbps, 320 kbps, 384kbps,
H0, 512 kbps, 768 kbps, 1152 kbps, 1472 kbps, 1536 kbps,
1920 kbps and Telephone
Example
: When calling an endpoint on a V.35 port configured for 384 kbps and the default call rate is 768 kbps, you must select 384 kbps to ensure proper framing and syncing.
Restrict (56K)
Select Restrict (56K) to use 56 kbps per ISDN B-channel.
Second Number
If two numbers are required, both should be specified for 2x64 kbps and 2x56 kbps calls.
Leave blank (default) if the endpoint only has one number.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
54
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
Add Participants
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
Dial Profile
Select which dial profile to use for this phone book entry.
Auto: The MPS will automatically select the appropriate profile
ISDN:
ISDN will always be used for dialling.
H.323: IP will always be used when dialling.
SIP: SIP will always be used when dialling.
If defined, custom Dial Profiles (Network Profiles) will show in the list.
Subaddress
The Subaddress is used to address different participants on the same ISDN line or TCS4 dialling.
DTMF String
Specify the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) or Touch Tone string.
Network Module
Specify which Network Interface Card to use for outgoing calls.
Enter a value between 0 and 6.
!"
Optional for ISDN calls
!"
Mandatory for V.35 calls and G.703 Leased Line calls.
Network ID
Used to identify port or interface number within a network module. Enter a value between 1 and 32:
!"
Specify which IP network to use, only
1
and
2
are valid values (optional).
!"
Specify which V.35 port to use (mandatory).
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
55
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Add Participants - Examples
Example with H.323/IP (H.323 ID):
The H.323 ID must be registered to a Gatekeeper.
Number: sales.manager
Call Type: N/A
Restrict (56 kbps): N/A
Second Number: N/A
Dial Profile: H.323
or Auto
Subaddress: N/A
DTMF String: N/A
Network Module: N/A
Network ID: N/A
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Example with H.323/IP (IP Address):
Calling a video system directly by IP Address.
Number: 127.0.0.16
Call Type: N/A
Restrict (56 kbps): N/A
Second Number: N/A
Dial Profile:
H.323
or
Auto
Subaddress: N/A
DTMF String: N/A
Network Module: N/A
Network ID: N/A
Example with ISDN:
A prefix might be required by the ISDN switch.
Number: 067125125
Call Type: N/A
Restrict (56 kbps): N/A
Second Number: N/A
Dial Profile:
ISDN
or
Auto
Subaddress: N/A
DTMF String: N/A
Network Module: N/A
Network ID: N/A
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Example with G.703 Leased Line:
Find which Slot and Port to use for the Network
Interface (ISDN) to the call.
Number:
3
(Call number 3, of max 5)
Call Type: 256 kbps (the # of channels x 64 kbps)
Restrict (56 kbps): N/A
Second Number: N/A
Dial Profile:
ISDN
or
Auto
Subaddress: N/A
DTMF String: N/A
Network Module:
2
(Network Interface Card
(ISDN) in slot 2)
Network ID:
5
(Port 5, PRI number 5)
Example with V.35:
Find which Slot and Port to use for the Network
Interface (V.35) to the call.
Number:
Leave empty
Call Type: 768 kbps (the # of channels x 64 kbps)
Restrict (56 kbps): N/A
Second Number: N/A
Dial Profile:
ISDN
or
Auto
Subaddress: N/A
DTMF String: N/A
Network Module:
3
(Network Interface Card
(V.35) in slot 3)
Network ID:
14
(Port 14)
Example with V.35 RS366:
Find which Network Interface (V.35) to use for the call.
Number:
6700#4#6#0
Call Type:
384 kbps
(the # of channels x 64 kbps)
Restrict (56 kbps): N/A
Second Number: N/A
Dial Profile:
ISDN
or
Auto
Subaddress: N/A
DTMF String: N/A
Network Module:
4
(Network Interface Card
(V.35) in slot 4)
Network ID:
31
(Port 31)
Example with SIP:
The SIP Alias must be registered to a SIP
Server.
Number:
Call Type: N/A
Restrict (56 kbps): N/A
Second Number: N/A
Dial Profile: SIP or Auto
Subaddress: N/A
DTMF String: N/A
Network Module: N/A
Network ID: N/A
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
56
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
CD('&:#*0/1/*)/&:#*;2<1!'(#*&
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
Conference Configuration
To change the conference configuration for this conference, press the
Conference Configuration button to show the Edit
Conference window.
Some settings cannot be changed when a conference is active.
Read More
To see a description of each setting go to the MCU
Overview > Create Conference section.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
57
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
B(!",8*&:#*;2<1!'(#*&
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
Dial In Configuration
To specify a dynamic dial in number for a conference, press the
Dial In Configuration
button. The
Direct Dial In Number to Conference # window will be shown.
Using Dial In Direct Numbers
To use Dial In Direct (DID) numbers, a DID has to be configured for the MPS. For details see Dial In Direct Numbers in the
MCU Configuration > Static Conferences section.
Numbers
The DID (Dial In Direct) numbers must be pre-defined MPS dial in numbers, either available on the ISDN PRI or available by
H.323 prefixes.
Number:
Specify the dial in number that will be directed into this conference.
Network Profile:
Select which net profile to use.
Caller Id: Specify the caller id, given by the network, for the calling participant. If the caller id does not match, the participant will not be included in the conference. If the Caller Id is left blank, no check will be performed.
Protected Numbers
If the Protect setting is set to On:
1.
The Protected Number field will be shown
2.
Only Protected Numbers are allowed to join this conference
Number: Specify the number given by the network for the calling participant.
Network Profile: Specify which net profile to use.
For further information, see the Protect
setting in the
Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
The Protect setting is set to
Off (default) and the Protected
Number field is not shown.
The Protect setting is set to On and the Protected Number field is shown. Only the
Protected Numbers configured in this dialog will be allowed to join this conference.
58
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
Conference status, the Basic tab
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Basic View -
Provides a basic overview of all the participants in the conference.
Advanced View -
Gives detailed information on the audio in, audio out and video in protocols and the bandwidth used by these protocols.
Terminal List -
List the participants in the conference. If the conference is cascaded to another conference, this will be shown here.
Change - The change view is used to modify endpoint constraints or move the endpoint to another conference.
Disconnect One Participant
To disconnect a participants in the conference
1.
Select a participant from the list and press the red Disconnect button.
2.
A confirmation window will be shown. Press
OK
to disconnect the participant.
Disconnect All
To disconnect all participants in the conference:
1.
Press the
Disconnect All
button.
2.
A confirmation window will be shown. Press OK to disconnect all participants.
3.
After disconnecting the participants, the End Conference button is enabled.
Disconnecting all participants will not end the conference itself; this will just disconnect all the participants in the conference. The conference can be restarted by pressing the green
Redial
Action button.
NOTE: Disconnecting all participants from an Ad-hoc conference will terminate the conference.
End Conference
To end the conference completely:
1.
Press the
End Conference
button. This button is only available when there are no active calls left in the conference.
2.
A confirmation window will be shown. Press
OK
to end the conference.
3.
The conference will loose its configuration and will be set to
[idle]
in the
MCU Overview
page.
Participants
Shows the name of the participants. You may change the displayed name in the Change view, see Change
DIsplay Name for details. You may also reset the participant name to the original system name.
Net
Shows the network protocol used for the connection:
H.323: The participant is connected on IP using the H.323 protocol.
H.320: The participant is connected on ISDN or V.35 using the H.320 protocol.
SIP: The participant is connected on IP using the SIP protocol
ISDN: The participant is connected on ISDN as a telephone.
Status
Shows the status of the connection:
Establ Out:
Shown during call setup between the participant and the MCU.
Alerting:
Waiting for the participant to answer the outgoing call.
Connected, 384 kbps:
The participant is connected at 384 kbps bandwidth.
Requesting Password:
To join the conference. the participant is requested to enter the conference password.
Initiating Encryption: Encryption is being initiated between the MCU and the participant.
Disconnected: The participant has either disconnected or been disconnected by the conference administrator.
Clear Out:
The MCU is currently disconnecting the participant.
Audio
Shows the audio status for each participant (not supported for SIP calls):
The participant is transmitting audio.
The participant has muted the microphone.
The participant is connected as a telephone.
The conference administrator has manually muted the participant.
59
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
Conference status, the Basic tab
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Basic View -
Provides a basic overview of all the participants in the conference.
Advanced View -
Gives detailed information on the audio in, audio out and video in protocols and the bandwidth used by these protocols.
Terminal List -
List the participants in the conference. If the conference is cascaded to another conference, this will be shown here.
Change - The change view is used to modify endpoint constraints or move the endpoint to another conference.
Video
Shows the video status for each participant.
The participant is transmitting video.
The participant is not transmitting video, for instance if the participant has set the video to Off or if the conference administrator has manually muted the participant.
In Picture
Shows the current Conference Layout and where each participant is displayed in the outgoing video image from the MCU.
Some examples:
The participant is in a Voice Switched conference and currently transmitting video to all the other participants.
Dual Video Stream (DuoVideo
TF
/H.239/BFCP)
Shows the Dual Video Stream status for each participant.
The participant is in a conference with 5+1 Split layout and is currently transmitting video to all the other participants in the larger quadrant.
The participant is in a conference with 7+1 Split layout and is currently transmitting video to all the other participants in the larger quadrant.
The participant is in a conference with 4 Split layout and is currently transmitting video to all the other participants in the top left quadrant.
The participant is transmitting Dual Video Stream.
The participant is receiving Dual Video Stream.
The participant is in a conference with 9 Split layout and is currently transmitting video to all the other participants in the top left quadrant.
The participant is in a conference with 16 Split layout and is currently transmitting video to all the other participants in the top left quadrant.
The participant has requested the floor or has been assigned the floor by the conference administrator and is transmitting video to all the other participants.
60
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
Conference status, the Basic tab
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
Basic View -
Provides a basic overview of all the participants in the conference.
Advanced View -
Gives detailed information on the audio in, audio out and video in protocols and the bandwidth used by these protocols.
Terminal List -
List the participants in the conference. If the conference is cascaded to another conference, this will be shown here.
Change - The change view is used to modify endpoint constraints or move the endpoint to another conference.
Actions
During the conference, the conference administrator is able to control each participant.
To disconnect a participant, press the
Disconnect
button. A confirmation window will be shown. Press
OK
to disconnect.
If a participant has been disconnected from the conference, the Redial
button is shown. Press the button to reconnect the participant.
The button is only available for outgoing MCU calls.
To assign the floor to a participant, press the
Assign Floor
button.
The participant is then transmitting video to all the other participants. The participants can also perform this function themselves, if they support the Request Floor (H.243 MVC) functionality.
To release the floor again, press the Release Floor button. This button is shown if the floor has been assigned by the conference administrator or if the participants have requested the floor themselves.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
To mute the microphone of a participant, press the
Mute Microphone button and the participant will not be heard by the other participants. Note that muted participants will not be able to un-mute themselves, since this was done from the MCU. The participants can, independently of this function, mute their microphone locally on their system.
To un-mute the microphone of a participant again, press the Un-Mute Microphone button. This button is only shown if the audio has been muted by the conference administrator.
To mute the video of a participant, press the Mute
Video Site button and the participant will not be seen by the other participants. Note that muted participants will not be able to un-mute themselves, since this was done from the MCU.
To un-mute the video of a participant again, press the Un-Mute Video Site button. This button is only shown if the video has been muted by the conference administrator.
To mute the loadspeaker of a participant, press the
Mute Loudspeaker button and the participant will not receive any audio from the conference. Note that muted participants will not be able to un-mute themselves, since this was done from the MCU.
To add a participant to the TANDBERG MPS Phone
Book press the Phone Book button.
To un-mute the loadspeaker of a participant again, press the
Un-Mute Loadspeaker
button. This button is only shown if the audio has been muted by the conference administrator.
Audio Input Level
Shows the measured input level from each of the conference participants.
61
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
Conference status, the Advanced tab
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
Basic View -
Provides a basic overview of all the participants in the conference.
Advanced View -
Gives detailed information on the audio in, audio out and video in protocols and the bandwidth used by these protocols.
Terminal List -
List the participants in the conference. If the conference is cascaded to another conference, this will be shown here.
Change - The change view is used to modify endpoint constraints or move the endpoint to another conference.
The Advanced View
The Advanced view gives a more detailed picture of the conference than the Basic view.
Audio In/Out:
Shows the audio protocol in use, and bandwidth used by the protocol.
Video In:
Shows the video protocol in use, and bandwidth used by the protocol.
Participant Info Page
To see all details about the call for each participant, click in the participant name and Participant information page is shown.
Call Info
Contains information about Call Status, Call, In/Out/Q.931 Rate, Number,
Dial In Number, TerminalID, TerminalName, Duration and Encryption.
Media Info
Contains information about Audio with Dynamic Rate, Packet Loss, Packet
Drop, Jitter, RSVP, Local Address and Remote Address; and Video with
Dynamic Rate, Packet Loss, Packet Drop, Jitter, RSVP, Local Address and
Remote Address; and Dual Stream, Data and Cap Set.
Refresh:
Press the Refresh button to do a quick refresh of the page.
Previous/Next: Press the Previous or Next button to see the previous or next participant page.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Click on a participant name to show the Call Info page.
Need a snapshot
62
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
Conference status, the Terminal List tab
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
Basic View -
Provides a basic overview of all the participants in the conference.
Advanced View -
Gives detailed information on the audio in, audio out and video in protocols and the bandwidth used by these protocols.
Terminal List -
List the participants in the conference. If the conference is cascaded to another conference, this will be shown here.
Change - The change view is used to modify endpoint constraints or move the endpoint to another conference.
Terminal List
The Terminal List will list all participants in conferences on the MCU.
MCUs in Cascade
The TANDBERG MPS supports two-level cascading, so the TANDBERG
MPS can be cascaded with other TANDBERG MPSs to increase the number of participants in one conference.
How to Initiate Cascaded Conference
By simply dialling from one TANDBERG MPS to other TANDBERG MPSs one will achieve a distributed setup.
Master/Slave
The TANDBERG MPS dialling out will be defined as the Master MCU. All other MCUs will be defined as Slave MCUs.
Read about cascaded MCUs in the Distributed MCUs chapter in the Appendices section.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
63
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Overview MCU,
cont...
Conference status, the Change tab
The Conference Status page shows information about a conference and lets you control the conference.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Basic View -
Provides a basic overview of all the participants in the conference.
Advanced View -
Gives detailed information on the audio in, audio out and video in protocols and the bandwidth used by these protocols.
Terminal List -
List the participants in the conference. If the conference is cascaded to another conference, this will be shown here.
Change - The change view is used to modify endpoint constraints or move the endpoint to another conference.
Participant
Shows the participant number or system name.
Applies for H.320, H.323 and SIP audio/video participants.
Layout Lock
Lock the participant to a fixed position in the conference view. This could be used when you want one particular participant to be displayed in the big square in a split Conference Layout.
Move to Conference
Move the participant to another conference (both created conferences and ongoing conferences).
!"
Press the Move button to move the participant to the other conference.
!"
The conference must be started in advance and should have the same basic settings.
!"
It is not possible to move a H.323 call to an encrypted conference.
The layout in use will decide how this will look like.
Please refer to Conference Layout > Lecture Mode for
details.
FUR Block
The conference administrator can block FUR (Fast Update
Request) for a participant. This will prevent Fast Update
Requests for the participant.
!"
Press the Block button in the FUR Block column to block fast update request for the selected participant.
FUR from an endpoint (video system) may degrade the experience for other participants. Selecting FUR Block to On may increase the quality for the other participants.
To block FURs from all sites, set
to FURBlock and
to On in the
Conference Configuration page.
Change Display Name
Change the participant name/text which is displayed in the bottom of the Conference Snapshots window. This will replace the system name if available.
!"
Press the
Set
button to change the displayed name.
!"
Press the Reset button to restore the original system name.
The Participant Identifier must be set to On or Auto to show the
name of a participant in the Conference Snapshot window.
Bandwidth Management
Press the Set to QCIF button to force the endpoint (video system) to move to a low rate encoder.
This is to enable more bandwidth to the other participants in the conference.
It is not possible to force the endpoint back to a higher-rate encoder without reconnecting the call.
FUR Rate
The system will display the FUR Rate; High or Low , for each participant.
Maximum Video Rate Out
Shows the maximum video rate, reported from the endpoint
(video system), which a site can receive.
64
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
The Gateway
Gateway Features
Encryption (Secure conference
TF
)
Secure conference
TF
AES (128 bit) and Secure conference
TF
DES (56 bit) are both supported through the Gateway.
Downspeeding
TF
When requested quality (bandwidth) cannot be established, Downspeeding
TF
makes the connection establish on as high quality as possible. If channels are dropped during a video conference, Downspeeding
TF
will ensure the connection being automatically maintained without interruption.
Far End Camera Control using H.224 (H.281)
Far End Camera Control using H.224 (H.281) allows seamless Far End Camera control through the
Gateway.
Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery (IPLR)
If the Gateway experiences packet loss from an IP endpoint, it will ask the endpoint to handle packet loss. This requires Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery
(IPLR) functionality on the video system (endpoint).
Text Chat (T.140)
Text Chat (T.140) is supported through the Gateway.
Dual Video Streams
DuoVideo
TF
/H.239 are supported from both ISDN and IP and allows participants at the far end to simultaneously view a presenter and a live presentation.
Gateway Support for OD/HD
!"
H.264 w288p, 400p, w448p, w576p
!"
H.263 w288p, 400p, w488p
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Gateway Capacity
Each Media Board can support up to 7680 kbps of total bandwidth.
Each Gateway call consists of two connections. Example: A 384 kbps Gateway call has one
H.323 site connected at 384 kbps and one H.320 site connected at 384 kbps. This means that this call is utilizing 768 kbps worth of bandwidth (384k + 384k = 768k).
Each Gateway option on the MPS allows for a maximum of 10 concurrent calls. This means that each Gateway option can support up to 10 concurrent calls at 384 kbps.
!"
Decreasing
the bandwidth of each call will not increase the maximum number of calls possible.
!"
Increasing
the bandwidth of each call will decrease the maximum number of calls.
Below is a chart outlining the maximum number of calls possible for each bandwidth that is supported on the Gateway.
Digital Clarity
TF
Participants enjoy presentations of exceptionally high quality resolution video.
Natural Video
TF
60 fields per second true interlaced picture (iCIF).
H.264 support through Gateway
TF
Superb video quality supporting the ITU video standard H.264.
AAC-LD support through Gateway
TF
True standards-based CD-quality audio supporting the audio standard AAC-LD.
Bandwidth in Use on Gateway
Maximum Number of Calls
Telephone 64 kbps Max 10 calls
64 kbps Max 10 calls
128 kbps Max 10 calls
192 kbps
256 kbps
384 kbps
512 kbps
Max 10 calls
Max 10 calls
Max 10 calls
Max 7 calls
Remaining Bandwidth
This would be 7168 kbps total which leaves
512 kbps remaining for lower rate calls
768 kbps
1152 kbps
Max 5 calls
Max 3 calls
1472 kbps
1536 kbps
Max 2 calls
Max 2 calls
This would be 6912 kbps total which leaves
768 kbps remaining for lower rate calls
This would be 5888 kbps total which leaves
1792 kbps remaining for lower rate calls
This would be 6144 kbps total which leaves
1536 kbps remaining for lower rate calls
1920 kbps Max 2 calls
Full H.243 Transparency
H.243 Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) Transparency allows seamless MCU control through the Gateway.
65
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Gateway Usage Information
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
The Usage pane for Gateway calls shows each active call through the Gateway (Load,
ISDN channels and number of calls).
Right above the Usage pane you can:
!"
Set Auto-Refresh to
On/Off
.
!"
Adjust the Refresh Rate (2-30 seconds)
!"
For a quick refresh click the Refresh button.
The General field displays some basic information:
!"
Software version
!"
IP address(es)
!"
Gatekeeper address and status
!"
SIP status
The Status field displays the connections status for the installed boards and cards:
!"
Media boards
!"
ISDN PRI card
!"
ISDN G.703 card
!"
SERIAL card
Indicates OK
Indicates a warning
Indicates an error
Click
More
to see more details.
The status of the Gateway resources:
!"
Calls 0 of 10 : Indicates that 0 calls are connected through the Gateway. The total number of supported calls in this configuration is 10.
!"
ISDN Channels 0 of 45 : Indicates that 0 ISDN channels are used on the TAND-
BERG MPS. The total number of supported ISDN channels in this configuration is
45.
!"
Load 0%
: Indicates 0% load on the Gateway resources.
!"
Assigned Bandwidth 50% : Indicates that 50% of the bandwidth is assigned for
Gateway calls.
!"
Load Limit 100% : Indicates that the Load Limit is set to 100%. When the Resource Usage reaches the “Busy on Load”-limit, the Gateway will signal this to the
Gatekeeper. The Gatekeeper will then try to route calls through other Gateways.
This is done to maintain availability for incoming ISDN calls when using multiple
Gateways.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
66
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
Gateway Calls Overview
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
GW Calls
Shows each active call through the gateway.
!"
[Idle]
No call is active.
!"
Active Call A call is active. Click on Active Call to see call info in details.
Source Shows the Status of the incoming call to the
Gateway. Shows the Number and which Network the incoming call is using.
Destination Shows the status of the outgoing call from the gateway, the number and which network the call is using.
Duration Shows the call duration of the current call.
Actions
When a call is active, the Administrator or Operator can disconnect the call, or transfer the call from one IP endpoint to another.
Disconnect Gateway Call
Will disconnect the selected gateway call. A confirmation window will be shown.
Call Transfer
The H.323 Call Transfer window is displayed. The Administrator or Operator can select an IP entry from the Phone Book or enter a
H.323 ID/IP address and transfer the H.323 (IP) call to another IP endpoint. If the transfer fails, the call will be disconnected.
Status
Shows the current status of the call.
!"
Idle
No active call.
!"
Establ Out
Gateway is calling out to destination.
!"
Alerting
Call is being connected.
!"
Connected Call is connected.
!"
Clear out
Call is being disconnected.
Number
ISDN or IP number.
Network
!"
ISDN
Call connected is using the H.320 protocol over ISDN.
!"
IP/H.323
Call connected is using the H.323 protocol over
IP.
Encryption (Secure Conference
TF
)
The Gateway supports Secure Conference DES and AES.
Indicates that DES (56 bit) encryption is used.
Indicates that AES (128 bit) encryption is used.
Indicates that the call is not encrypted.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
67
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Disconnect a Gateway call
Actions -
When a call is active the Administrator or Operator can
Disconnect
the call, or
Transfer
the call from one IP endpoint to another.
Select the Overview tab and GW
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
1.
Identify which call to be disconnected from the
Gateway Overview
page.
2.
Press the
Disconnect Call
actions button to disconnect the selected Gateway call.
3.
A confirmation window will be shown:
!"
Press OK to Disconnect the call
!"
Press
Cancel
to discard the action
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
68
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Transfer a Gateway call
Actions -
When a call is active the Administrator or Operator can
Disconnect
the call, or
Transfer
the call from one IP endpoint to another.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
1.
Identify which call to transfer from the Gateway Overview
page.
2.
Press the
Transfer Call
actions button.
3.
A
H.323 Call Transfer
window will be shown.
4.
Select a
H.323
entry from the Phone Book or enter an IP address or E.164
alias into the
Manual Dial field.
!"
Press Transfer Call button to initiate the transfer
!"
Press the Cancel button to discard the transfer.
!
If the transfer fails the call will be disconnected.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
69
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
The Phone book
Select the
Phonebook
tab
Search
Enter the first characters of the name or the complete name to find a name in the list.
Add New Entry
Press the Add New
Entry button to open the
Add Entry
dialog box (discussed on the
following pages).
Add New Group Entry
Press the Add New
Group Entry button to open the
Add Group Entry
dialog box (discussed
on the following pages).
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
All settings for single entries and group entries are explained on the following pages.
Number of Entries
There is support for:
!"
Up to 250 local entries in the phone book.
!"
Up to 16 Group Entries.
!"
Each Group Entry can have up to 32 members.
Edit: Select an entry from the list and press the Edit button to open the
Edit Entry
dialog box.
Delete:
Select an entry from the list and press the Delete button to delete an entry.
A confirmation dialog will show to let you confirm the action.
70
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
The Phone book,
cont...
My Contacts, Add New Entry
Name
Enter the name of the phone book entry.
Number
Enter the video number, telephone number or RS366 dial string.
For G.703 Leased Line calls, this is the call number (1 to 5).
Call Type
Telephone:
Set to Telephone if the number entered above is a telephone number.
Auto:
When set to Auto (default) the configured Maximum Conference Rate will be used.
Custom Selection: Select the call rate to be used.
(64 kbps, 2x64 (H.221) kbps, 128 kbps, 192 kbps, 256 kbps,
320 kbps, 320 kbps, 384 kbps, H0 (384 kbps), 512 kbps, 768 kbps, 1152 kbps, 1472 kbps, 1920 kbps)
Second Number
If two numbers are required, both should be specified for 2x64 kbps and 2x56 kbps calls.
Leave blank (default) if the endpoint only has one number.
Subaddress
The Subaddress is used to address different participants on the same ISDN line or TCS4 dialling.
Dial Profile
Select which dial profile to use for this phone book entry.
Auto: The MPS will automatically select the appropriate profile
ISDN: ISDN will always be used for dialling.
H.323:
H.323 will always be used when dialling.
SIP: SIP will always be used when dialling.
If defined, custom Dial Profiles (Network Profiles) will show in the list.
Restrict (56K)
Select Restrict (56K) to use 56 kbps per ISDN
B-channel.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Network ID
Used to identify port or interface number within a network module. Enter a value between 1 and 32:
!"
Specify which IP network to use, only 1 and 2 are valid values (optional).
!"
Specify which V.35 port to use (mandatory).
Network Module
Specify which Network Interface Card to use for outgoing calls. Enter a value between 0 and 6.
!"
Optional for ISDN calls
!"
Mandatory for V.35 calls and G.703 Leased Line calls.
Create New
Select Create New to save the new Phone
Book Entry.
Cancel
Select Cancel to discard all changes and return to the
Phone Book
.
71
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
The Phone book,
cont...
My Contacts, Edit New Entry
Name
Enter the name of the phone book entry.
Number
Enter the video number, telephone number or RS366 dial string.
For G.703 Leased Line calls, this is the call number (1 to 5).
Call Type
Telephone:
Set to Telephone if the number entered above is a telephone number.
Auto: When set to Auto (default) the configured Maximum Conference Rate will be used.
Custom Selection: Select the call rate to be used.
(64 kbps, 2x64 (H.221) kbps, 128 kbps, 192 kbps, 256 kbps,
320 kbps, 320 kbps, 384 kbps, H0 (384 kbps), 512 kbps, 768 kbps, 1152 kbps, 1472 kbps, 1920 kbps)
Second Number
If two numbers are required, both should be specified for 2x64 kbps and 2x56 kbps calls.
Leave blank (default) if the endpoint only has one number.
Subaddress
The Subaddress is used to address different participants on the same ISDN line or TCS4 dialling.
Dial Profile
Select which dial profile to use for this phone book entry.
Auto: The MPS will automatically select the appropriate profile
ISDN: ISDN will always be used for dialling.
H.323:
H.323 will always be used when dialling.
SIP: SIP will always be used when dialling.
If defined, custom Dial Profiles (Network Profiles) will show in the list.
Restrict (56K)
Select Restrict (56K) to use 56 kbps per ISDN
B-channel.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Network ID
Used to identify port or interface number within a network module. Enter a value between 1 and 32:
!"
Specify which IP network to use, only 1 and 2 are valid values (optional).
!"
Specify which V.35 port to use (mandatory).
Network Module
Specify which Network Interface Card to use for outgoing calls. Enter a value between 0 and 6.
!"
Optional for ISDN calls
!"
Mandatory for V.35 calls and G.703 Leased Line calls.
Save
Select Save to save the changes to this Phone
Book Entry.
Cancel
Select Cancel to discard all changes and return to the
Phone Book
.
72
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
The Phone book,
cont...
Add Group Entry
Group Entry
The Group entries are useful for recurring meetings where the same participants meet each time. By doing this, only the group entry has to be selected in the
Add Participants
menu and the participants are automatically called.
This view is opened from the Phone Book. Select
Phone Book from the top menu and press the
Add
New Group Entry button.
You can define up to 16 Group Entries.
Each Group Entry can have up to 32 members.
Name
Enter a name for the Group Entry.
Add ->
Select a name from the Phone Book list and press the
Add ->
button to add the name into the Participants list.
<- Remove
Select a name from the Participants list and press the <- Remove button to remove the name from the
Participants list.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Create New
Select
Create New
to save the new Phone
Book Group Entry.
Cancel
Select
Cancel
to discard all changes and return to the Phone Book .
73
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Chapter 4
System status
The System Status gives an overview of the status for the boards and cards installed on the MPS. The information will reflect a fully equipped MPS and may differ from the MPS delivered.
Stay up-to-date
We recommend you visit the TANDBERG web site regularly for an updated version of this guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs
In this chapter...
74
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
H.320 Board Status
H.320 Status
The H.320 Status shows the system clock port, rate, state and type.
!
If in an error state, there may be problems establishing calls on all H.320 networks (i.e.
PRI, G703 and Serial V.35).
Status of H.320 reference clock
The first extension board will always be used as the external clock reference for the H.320 system clock.
PRI/G.703 and V.35 are all synchronous networks which require a clock-reference. The clock reference must be taken from the extension board connected to the first media-blade.
System Clock Port:
The port or interface in use.
System Clock Rate:
The frequency of the clock reference which is between 56 kHz and 1920 kHz. The intervals are in steps of 56 kHz or 64 kHz.
System Clock State:
OK:
If OK, the system is using an external clock reference.
Error:
If Error, the system has no external reference and clock slips may occur.
System Clock Type:
Which type of extension board in use, V.35 or PRI.
Using the MPS System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
75
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
ISDN PRI Board Status
ISDN PRI Board Status
If a PRI cable is disconnected or malfunctioning, or basic configuration is erroneous,
!"
Red Alarm is displayed in red for the affected interfaces.
!"
Sync alert is displayed in red for the affected interfaces.
!"
Clock Slip shows the number of Clock Slips in the G.703 network the last 24 hours. Clock Slips may lead to problems establishing calls and reduced call quality. After correcting the network errors, please reset the counter by pressing the
Clear-button.
If a participant has been disconnected, the cause code can be viewed by pressing the link next to the disconnected PRI channel.
Using the MPS
The most common cause codes (for ISDN):
1 Unallocated (unassigned) number
2 No route to specified transit network (WAN)
16 Normal call clearing
17 User busy
18 No user responding
21 Call rejected
28 Invalid number format (incomplete number)
29 Facilities rejected
31 Normal, unspecified
34 No Circuit/Channel Available
41 Temporary Failure
58 Bearer Capability Not Presently Available
65 Bearer Capability Not Implemented
69 Requested Facility Not Implemented
81 Invalid Call Reference Value
88 Incompatible Destination
100 Invalid Information Element Contents
102 Recovery On Timer Expiry
127 Interworking, Unspecified
OK Warning
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Error
76
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
G.703 Board Status
G.703 Board Status
This page gives status information about available channels and which calls are connected and recently disconnected.
!"
Red Alarm may indicate that the cable is faulty or disconnected.
!"
Sync alert may indicate that the MPS or your
G.703 network is not correctly configured.
!"
Clock Slip shows the number of Clock Slips in the G.703 network the last 24 hours. Clock Slips may lead to problems establishing calls and reduced call quality. After correcting the network errors, please reset the counter by pressing the
Clear-button.
Using the MPS System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
OK Warning Error
77
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Serial V.35 Board Status
Serial V.35 Board Status
Clock rate:
Displays the current clock rate for each individual Serial port. When a port is active in a call this will display the call rate that the port is connected at. If used for external clocking on the MPS this will display the rate of the clock that the MPS is receiving from the network.
Clock TXSync/Clock RXSync:
Displays the current
Tx data clock and Rx data clock synchronization status for each individual port. If status is On the data clock is synchronized with the internal reference clock of the MPS. If status is Off the data clock is not synchronized with the internal reference clock of the MPS. During a call both RxSync and
TxSync should be On. If not there is a problem with the clock synchronization of either the MPS or the external equipment. Lack of clock synchronization may cause severe deterioration of video and audio quality and may even prevent call establishment.
For further information please refer to the System
Clock configuration in the System Configuration >
Miscellaneous section.
CD: Displays the current status for Carrier Detect for each individual port. When a port is active in a call this will show “On”. When a port is in the idle state this will show “Off”.
DTR:
Displays the current status for Data Terminal
Ready for each individual port. When a port is active in a call or assigned to a conference this will show “On”. When a port is in the idle state this will show “Off”.
Using the MPS System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
OK Warning Error
78
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Media Board IP Status
Media Board IP Status
Red alarm indicates the Ethernet interface on the
Media Board is down.
IP Address
Shows the IP Address of the Media Processing
Board.
IP Subnet Mask
Shows the IP Subnet Mask of the Media Processing
Board.
IP Gateway
Shows the IP Gateway of the Media Processing
Board.
MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the Media Processing
Board.
Ethernet Speed
Shows the speed on the Ethernet interface of the
Media Processing Board.
Temperature Celsius
Shows the temperature of the Media Processing
Board in Celsius.
Temperature Fahrenheit
Shows the temperature of the Media Processing
Board in Fahrenheit.
NOTE: Please ensure that there are no IP Address conflicts in your network. This is not detected by the MPS and may lead to loss of video and audio.
Using the MPS
OK Warning
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Error
79
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
H.323 Status
IP Address
Shows the IP address of the TANDBERG MPS configured for Network #1.
H.323 Gatekeeper Status
Shows status and IP address of the Gatekeeper for
Network#1, which the TANDBERG MPS is registered to.
!"
Inactive
means the TANDBERG MPS is not registered to a Gatekeeper.
!"
Registering
means the TANDBERG MPS is having problems registering with the selected
Gatekeeper.
!"
Registered means the TANDBERG MPS is registered with the selected Gatekeeper.
Using the MPS
IP Address 2
Shows the IP address of the TANDBERG MPS configured for Network #2.
H.323 Gatekeeper Status 2
Shows status and IP address of the Gatekeeper for
Network #2, which the TANDBERG MPS is registered to.
!"
Inactive means the TANDBERG MPS is not registered to a Gatekeeper.
!"
Registering
means the TANDBERG MPS is having problems registering with the selected
Gatekeeper.
!"
Registered
means the TANDBERG MPS is registered with the selected Gatekeeper.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
80
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
SIP Status
Mode - Shows if the SIP service is enabled or not.
Server Status
Show status towards the configured SIP server i.e. whether or not the MPS can find a server. Possible states are:
!"
INACTIVE - SIP server not in use
!"
DNS FAILED - DNS not set, external DNS server not found or SIP server address not found at DNS server
!"
TIMEOUT - SIP server not answering.
!"
UNABLE CONNECT TCP - Unable to connect to SIP server on TCP
!"
ACTIVE - Normal case, when server is found.
!"
UNKNOWN - Status unknown
Server Address -
Shows the connected SIP server address. If no server is selected, the normal state will be Off
Using the MPS
Server Authentication - Shows if server NTLM or Digest
Authentication is turned On or Off
Registration
One status line for each possible conference, all with their own unique SIP URI. Possible states are:
!"
INACTIVE - No SIP URI’s have been logged on to server. In cases where the server Authentication is off, the different
SIP URI’s don’t need to be registered, and will be reported as inactive
!"
REGISTERING - The server is registering the Conference URI
!"
REGISTERED - The Conference URI is registered on the SIP server.
!"
DEREGISTERING - The conference URI is deregistering from the SIP server.
!"
FAILED - The SIP server failed to register the URI
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
81
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
System Information
System Unit
!"
Product Type - Shows the TANDBERG product type
!"
Product ID - Shows the TANDBERG product id
!"
Up Time in Seconds - Shows the uptime since last boot in seconds
!"
Up Time - Shows the uptime since last boot in days, hours, minutes and seconds
Software
!"
Version - Shows the installed software version
!"
Name - Shows the installed software name
!"
Release Date - Shows the installed software release date
Configuration
!"
Telephony - Shows the total number of telephone options
!"
Video Telephony - Shows the total number of Video Telephone options
!"
Advanced Video Options - Shows the total number of Advanced Video options
!"
Encryption - Shows the total number of encryption sites
!"
PRI Ports - Shows the total number of PRI port options
!"
Serial Ports - Shows the total number of serial port options
!"
Maximum Bandwidth - Shows the maximum bandwidth installed
Managed Resources
!"
Conference - Shows the number of conferences available for scheduled conferences
!"
Fully Featured Conferences - Shows the number of fully featured conferences available for scheduled conferences
!"
Encoders - Shows the number of encoders available for scheduled conferences
!"
Telephony - Shows the number of telephone calls available for scheduled conferences
!"
Video Telephony - Shows the number of video calls available for scheduled conferences
!"
Advanced Video Option - Shows the number of advanced video calls available for scheduled conferences
!"
Encryption - Shows the number of encrypted calls available for scheduled conferences
!"
Max Bandwidth - Shows the maximum bandwidth available for scheduled conferences
!"
Max B Channel PRI - Shows the maximum number of B channels available for scheduled conferences
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
82
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
System Information
, cont...
MCU Resources
!"
Conference - Shows the total number of conferences available on the MPS
!"
Fully Featured Conferences - Shows the total number of fully featured conferences available on the MPS
!"
Encoders - Shows the total number of encoders available on the MPS
!"
Telephony - Shows the total number of telephone sites available on the MPS
!"
Video Telephony - Shows the total number of video telephone sites available on the
MPS
!"
Maximum Bandwidth - Shows the maximum bandwidth available on the MPS
!"
Maximum B Channel PRI - Shows the maximum number of B channels available on the MPS
Total Gateway Resources
!"
Gateway Call - Shows the maximum number of Gateway calls available on the MPS
!"
Maximum B Channel PRI - Shows the maximum number of B channels available for the Gateway on the MPS
Hardware
!"
Serial Number - Shows the serial number for the MPS
!"
Main Board - Shows the mainboard id for the MPS
!"
Boot Software - Shows the boot software id for the MPS
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
83
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
System Information
, cont...
Total
!"
Conference - Shows the total number of conference used on the MPS
!"
Telephony - Shows the total number of telephone calls used on the MPS
!"
Video Telephony - Shows the number of video calls used on the MPS
!"
B Channel PRI - Shows the total number of B channels used on the MPS
!"
Bandwidth - Shows the total bandwidth used on the MPS
Gateway
!"
Gateway Calls - Shows the number of Gateway calls used
!"
B Channel PRI - Shows the number of B channels used by the Gateway
MCU
!"
Conference - Shows the number of conferences used by the MCU
!"
Telephony - Shows the number for telephone calls used by the MCU
!"
Video Telephony - Shows the number of video calls used by the MCU
!"
Bandwidth - Shows the bandwidth used by the MCU
!"
B Channel PRI - Shows the number of B channels used by the MCU
Ethernet(s)
!"
MAC Address - Shows the Ethernet MacAddress(es)
!"
Ethernet Speed - Shows the Ethernet speed(s)
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
84
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Chapter 5
System configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
The System Configuration section contains information about how to configure and maintain the MPS.
Stay up-to-date
We recommend you visit the TANDBERG web site regularly for an updated version of this guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs
In this chapter...
Serial V.35 Board Configuration
Dialog pictures, Dialog Sounds and Symbols
85
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
>4?=E&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
The Network Type must correspond with configurations set in the
PRI Board Configuration
if you have a PRI card or the
G.703 Board Configuration if you have a leased line.
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Slot (1 to n)
Select Slot
1
to
6
to configure the H.320 board(s). The illustration shows that Slot 1 and 3 are configured for H.320, while
Slot 2, 4, 5 and 6 are not configured.
Network Type
Select which type of H.320 (ISDN) network each of the ISDN network cards are connected to:
PRI: ISDN Line
G.703:
Leased line
Description
Enter a compulsory textual description to easier identify each card.
System Clock from Port
Select which port to use as the System Clock source.
NB! If there are problems with this source, all H.320 calls may experience problems.
Press the
Save
button to save changes
86
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
9@8&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
PRI Board Configuration, Slot 1–n
The
Network Type
must correspond with configurations set in the PRI Board Configuration .
Using the MPS
Send Complete
On: The TANDBERG MPS will send the ISDN message information element <
Sending Complete> in the outgoing call
Setup message. This is only required in a few countries.
Off: The TANDBERG MPS will not send <
Sending Complete> (Default: Off).
Send Number
On: The TANDBERG MPS will send its own number to the far end. This is only useful when each conference have specified a Dial In number (Default: On).
Off:
The TANDBERG MPS will not send its own number to the far end. Please note that the network may still send your number to the far end.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Parallel Dial
On: Channels will be dialed and connected in parallel when setting up a BONDING call (Default: On).
Off: Channels will be dialed sequentially, which may increase setup time.
HLC
On: Enables sending of HLC (High Level Compatibility) information element in setup message (video calls only).
Off: Disables sending of HLC information element in setup message (video calls only), (Default: Off).
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
87
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
9@8&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
, cont...
PRI Board Configuration, Slot 1–n
The
Network Type
must correspond with configurations set in the PRI Board Configuration .
Using the MPS
Speech Timers
On: If set to on, this will turn on Layer 3 timers T310, T304 and T301 for telephone calls (Default: On).
Off: If set to off, this will turn off Layer 3 timing.
NSF Telephony Mode
On: If set to on, NSF service code for telephone calls will be enabled.
Off: If set to off, NSF service code will be disabled (Default:
Off).
NSF Telephony Number
Your network provider may require a service selection in your
ISDN configuration.
Enter the Service code here. Valid NSF service codes are from
0 to 31 (National, AT&T or Japan/Taiwan ISDN).
NSF Video Mode
On: If set to on, NSF service code for video calls will be enabled.
Off:
If set to off, NSF service code will be disabled (Default:
Off).
NSF Video Number
Your network provider may require a service selection in your
ISDN configuration.
Enter the Service code here. Valid NSF service codes are from
0
to
31
(National, AT&T or Japan/Taiwan ISDN).
NSF - Network Specific Facilities
Read about NSF Service Codes in Appendices section.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
88
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
9@8&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
, cont...
PRI Board Configuration, Slot 1–n
The
Network Type
must correspond with configurations set in the PRI Board Configuration .
Using the MPS
Switch Type - Select between the following PRI protocols:
!"
National ISDN
!"
AT&T Custom ISDN
!"
ETSI (Euro ISDN)
!"
Japan/Taiwan ISDN
NOTE!
All PRI lines on the same E1/T1 Interface Card must use the same PRI Protocol.
Trunk Groups
On: When Trunk Groups is enabled, all of the PRI lines on the same E1/T1 Interface Card will use the same number range as specified for PRI 1, i.e. you will only need to specify the number range start and stop for port 1 and leave the fields for the other ports empty. (Default: On)
It is however necessary to set each individual port to On/Off in the Interface Configuration section below in this menu. See the next page.
Off:
When set to Off, the Trunk Groups is disabled.
Initial Restart
On:
When set to On, the PRI interfaces will be reinitialized after boot (Default: On).
Off:
When set to Off, the PRI interfaces will not be reinitialized after boot.
Alert
On:
If set to On, the system will respond with an alert message to all incoming setup messages.
Off:
If set to Off, the system will respond with an alert message only to the incoming setup message related to the initial channel (Default: Off).
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
89
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
9@8&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
, cont...
PRI Board Configuration, PRI Interface 1–n
The
Network Type
must correspond with configurations set in the PRI Board Configuration .
Using the MPS
PRI Interface Configuration
This section configures each of the PRI interfaces individually. There is one column for each PRI interface (IF 1, IF 2, IF
3, etc). However, if PRI Trunk Groups is enabled, the number range for PRI 1 will also apply for all the enabled PRI interfaces on the same E1/T1 Interface Card.
Enable Port
On:
(default) If set to on, the PRI interface (IF #) is enabled.
Off:
If set to off, the PRI interface (IF #) is disabled.
Max Channels
Indicates the maximum number of B-channels the TANDBERG
MPS is allowed to use for each of the PRI-interfaces.
!"
For E1 (ETSI/Euro ISDN), the maximum number of channels is 30. (Default: 30 for E1)
!"
For T1 (National ISDN and AT&T Custom), the maximum number of channels is 23. (Default: 23 for T1)
High Channel
Indicates the highest numbered E1/T1 B-channel the TAND-
BERG MPS is allowed to use for each PRI-line when selecting channels for outgoing calls. (Default: 23 for T1 and 31 for E1)
Low Channel
Indicates the lowest numbered E1/T1 B-channel the TAND-
BERG MPS is allowed to use for each PRI-line when selecting channels for outgoing calls. (Default: 1 for both T1 and E1).
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
- continued: PRI Board Configuration
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
90
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
9@8&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
, cont...
PRI Board Configuration, PRI Interface 1–n
The
Network Type
must correspond with configurations set in the PRI Board Configuration .
Using the MPS
Search
Specifies where the TANDBERG MPS will start searching for available B-channels for each PRI-line for an outgoing call.
High:
If set to High, the TANDBERG MPS will start to search for available B-channels at the highest numbered B-channel (Default: High)
Low: If set to Low, the TANDBERG MPS will start searching for available B-channels at the lowest numbered B-channel.
The MPS tries to keep the H0-channels free as long as possible and will therefore not start searching at the lowest numbered channel when set to Low.
Number Range Start
The PRI lines connected to the TANDBERG MPS should have at least one number each, to allow dial in from ISDN. If the PRI line has a range of numbers, the start number must be entered here.
(Default: Empty)
The number range must be inclusive. All numbers in the range may be used by the TANDBERG MPS for callback numbers, so the local ISDN switch must route all of these numbers to the configured PRI. Please contact your IT manager or ISDN service provider to obtain these numbers.
It is only necessary to enter the digits indicating the range. If the range is 67828669 to 67828699, then just enter 8669. Maximum amount of digits is 24.
Number Range Stop
Here is where the last number in the PRI number range is entered. If the range is 67828669 to 67828699, then just enter
8699. (Default: Empty)
NOTE: When receiving a call with the Gateway configured with only one number in the PRI number range, all other incoming calls will be blocked until the ongoing call is established. This is because the network will have no additional number available for the second call while setting up the call. When the call is established the number will be available and any incoming call will connect as normal.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
- continued: PRI Board Configuration
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
91
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
9@8&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
, cont...
PRI Board Configuration, PRI Interface 1–n
The
Network Type
must correspond with configurations set in the PRI Board Configuration .
Using the MPS
Allow NFAS
On: If set to On, the Allow NFAS is enabled.
Off:
If set to Off, the Allow NFAS is disabled.
Non-Facilities Associated Signalling (NFAS), is an ISDN feature for sharing one ISDN D-channel across multiple ISDN PRI interfaces.
!"
The NFAS is only available on T1 networks
!"
Backup D channels are not currently supported.
Example: If we use NFAS to share one D channel across eight
PRI interfaces, we will gain seven extra B channels over a configuration that used one D channel per PRI interface. Additionally we may save expenses related to seven D channels.
INFO:
setting should be set to Off when the
Allow NFAS setting is enabled.
NFAS Group ID
It is possible to have 4 NFAS groups per card, where each group may cover two or more PRI interfaces. Enter a value between 1 and 4.
INFO:
This setting will only take effect when Allow NFAS is set to On.
NFAS Interface ID
Each interface in an NFAS group must be assigned an NFAS
Interface ID.
!"
These IDs must be the same as the ones used on the network side of the interface.
!"
Enter a value between 0 and 127.
!"
The interface carrying the D channel for signalling must be set to 0.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
- continued: PRI Board Configuration
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
92
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
9@8&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
, cont...
PRI Board Configuration, E1/T1 Interface 1–n
The
Network Type
must correspond with configurations set in the PRI Board Configuration .
Using the MPS
This section describes how to configure each of the E1/T1 interfaces, with one column for each interface (IF1, IF2,IF3, etc).
However, if PRI Trunk Groups is enabled, the number range for
PRI 1 will also apply for all the enabled PRI interfaces on the same E1/T1 Interface Card.
E1 CRC4
Used for most E1-PRI configurations.
On:
If set to On, the E1 CRC4 is enabled.
Off: If set to Off, the E1 CRC4 is disabled. If your network equipment does not support this feature, turn it Off.
T1 Cable Length
Specifies the cable length between the TANDBERG MPS and the CSU for each of the PRI lines (only valid for T1 networks).
Possible values are:
!"
Range1: 0 to 133 feet
!"
Range2: 133 to 266 feet
!"
Range3: 266 to 399 feet
!"
Range4: 399 to 533 feet
!"
Range5: 533 to 655 feet
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
- continued: PRI Board Configuration
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
93
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
G4HE?&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
PRI Board Configuration
Ensure that
Network Type
is set to
G.703
for the connected
ISDN cards in the PRI Network Configuration .
Using the MPS
G.703 Board
Leased Line is a non-dialling protocol. Should be used when:
1.
One codec is connected in a point to point connection
2.
Through an ISDN switch supporting G.703 Leased Line mapping.
NOTE!
It may be necessary to specify the call rate explicitly when dialling a G.703 call id to ensure that the correct call rate is used.
Slot (1 to n)
Select Slot
1
to
6
to configure the G.703 (Leased Line) board.
The picture shows one G.703 board installed in Slot 3.
OK Warning Error
Physical Layer
Select E1 (max 30+1 channels) or T1 (max 23+1 channels) to match your ISDN network.
Interface (1 to 8)
The interface number refers to the port number/G.703 interface of the Network Interface Card.
Enable
On:
If set to On, the port is enabled for G.703 use.
Off:
If set to Off, the port is disabled for G.703 use.
Include Channel 16 (E1)
On: Includes channel 16 when configured as E1.
Off:
Disables channel 16 when configured as E1 .
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
94
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
G4HE?&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
, cont...
PRI Board Configuration
Ensure that
Network Type
is set to
G.703
for the connected
ISDN cards in the PRI Network Configuration .
G.703 Board
Leased Line is a non-dialling protocol. Should be used when:
1.
One codec is connected in a point to point connection
2.
Through an ISDN switch supporting G.703 Leased Line mapping.
Channel (1 to 5)
For each G.703 Leased Line interface it is possible to define one or more calls. Each call is identified by a number (“callid”), a start channel and max number of channels. The maximum number of possible calls is 5.
Start Channel (1 to 5) Max Channels (1 to 5)
E1: Start channel <1..31> Max channels <0 (Off), 1..31>
T1: Start channel <1..24> Max channels <0 (Off), 1..24>
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Table: Example with four different call settings:
Start Channel 1
Max Channels 1
Start Channel 2
Max Channels 2
Start Channel 3
Max Channels 3
Start Channel 4
Max Channels 4
Start Channel 5
Max Channels 5
5 Calls
1
4 Calls
1
4 (256 k) 6 (384 k)
5 7
4 (256 k) 6 (384 k)
9 13
4 (256 k) 6 (384 k)
13 19
4 (256 k) 6 (384 k)
17
4 (256 k)
3 Calls
1
8 (512 k)
9
8 (512 k)
17
8 (512 k)
2 Calls
1
12 (768 k)
13
12 (768 k)
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
95
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
89&:#*;2<1!'(#*
IP Configuration Interface 1 and 2
As a minimum you must configure Interface 1. If your TAND-
BERG MPS is connected to two different IP-networks, you must configure both Interface 1 and Interface 2.
INFO: Before you can access the MPS from a web browser the initial configuration, of a static IP address for the System
Controller Board, is done via the LCD.
Address
The IP Address defines the network address of the System
Controller Board. Your LAN administrator will provide you with the correct address for this field.
Subnet Mask
The IP Subnet Mask defines the type of network. Your LAN administrator will provide the correct value for this field.
Gateway
The IP Gateway defines the Gateway address. Your LAN administrator will provide the correct value for this field.
Ethernet Speed
Auto: The MCU will automatically detect the speed/duplex on the LAN.
10Half: The MCU will connect to the LAN using 10 Mbps/Half
Duplex.
10Full:
The MCU will connect to the LAN using 10 Mbps/Full
Duplex.
100Half:
The MCU will connect to the LAN using 100 Mbps/
Half Duplex.
100Full:
The MCU will connect to the LAN using 100 Mbps/
Full Duplex.
!
If forcing the TANDBERG MPS to anything other than
Auto then the Ethernet switch must also be forced to match.
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
Restart
- For the settings to take effect the unit must be restarted after pressing the Save button.
96
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
89&:#*;2<1!'(#*
, cont...
DNS Interface 1 and 2
DNS Server defines the network addresses for DNS servers, interface 1 and 2. Up to 5 addresses may be specified.
If the network addresses are unknown, please contact your
LAN administrator or Internet Service Provider.
The DNS Domain Name is the default domain name suffix which is added to unqualified names.
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
- continued: IP Configuration
IP Services
This is the NTP time server address from which the system can get updated time information.
!"
The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used to synchronize the time of the system to a reference time server.
!"
The NTP IP setting holds the IP address to a time source where the system can get the exact time.
!"
The time server will subsequently be queried every 24th hour for time updates.
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
Restart
- For the settings to take effect the unit must be restarted after pressing the Save button.
97
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
I/D(!&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Media Board Configuration - Slot (1 to n)
Select Slot
1
to
12
to configure the Media Board(s). The picture shows that Media Boards are installed Slot 1, 2 and 3.
OK Warning Error
Using the MPS
Network ID
1: The Media Processing Board is connected to the same IPnetwork as the System Controller Board Interface 1.
2: The Media Processing Board is connected to the same IPnetwork as the System Controller Board Interface 2.
Ethernet Speed
Auto: The MCU will automatically detect the speed/duplex on the LAN.
10Half: The MCU will connect to the LAN using 10 Mbps/Half
Duplex.
10Full: The MCU will connect to the LAN using 10 Mbps/Full
Duplex.
100Half: The MCU will connect to the LAN using 100 Mbps/
Half Duplex.
100Full:
The MCU will connect to the LAN using 100 Mbps/
Full Duplex.
!
If forcing the TANDBERG MPS to anything other than
Auto then the Ethernet switch must also be forced to match.
Address
The IP Address defines the network address of the Media
Board. Your LAN administrator will provide you with the correct address for this field.
Subnet Mask
The IP Subnet Mask defines the type of network. Your LAN administrator will provide the correct value for this field.
Gateway
The IP Gateway defines the Gateway address. Your LAN administrator will provide the correct value for this field.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
NOTE: Please ensure that there are no IP Address conflicts in your network. This is not detected by the
MPS and may lead to loss of video and audio.
98
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
5/1(!"&J4?K&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Slot (1 to n)
Select Slot 1 to 6 to configure the Serial V.35 Board(s). The picture shows that Serial V.35 Boards installed on Slot 2.
OK Warning Error
Using the MPS
Internal Clock Rate
Sets the Internal Clock Rate which the MPS will provide to all ports when
Clocking
is set to
Internal
. Can be set to a clock rate from 64kbps up to 1920kbps.
Restrict
This Restrict setting will impact the Internal Clock Rate only.
In addition, each port using internal clocking must also have the Restrict set to on.
On: Setting Restrict to On will increment the Internal Clock
Rates in steps of 56kbps.
Off: Setting Restrict to Off will increment the Internal Clock
Rates in steps of 64kbps.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Call Control, port 1-32
Sets the call control settings to each port
Dial Manual:
Select Dial Manual when no handshake signals are available or when using RS366 with other IMUX and the external equipment requires a constantly connected line.
(Default: Dial Manual)
RS366 ADTRAN:
Select RS366 ADTRAN only when connected to an ADTRAN ISU 512.
!"
The ADTRAN ISU 512 offers extra usability when dialling
RS366 via an ADTRAN ISU 512 IMUX.
!"
This dialling scheme will map the call type and bandwidth selection to ADTRAN ISU 512 specific suffixes to the dialled number.
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
99
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
5/1(!"&J4?K&F#!1D&:#*;2<1!'(#*
, cont...
Slot (1 to n)
Select Slot 1 to 6 to configure the Serial V.35 Board(s). The picture shows that Serial V.35 Boards installed on Slot 2.
OK Warning Error
Clocking, port 1-32
Sets the clocking mode to each port
Dual: When using RS449, RS530, and V.35 the external equipment provides two clock signals, one for transmit and one for receive. The difference between RS449, RS530 and
V.35 is the cable only (Default: Dual).
Single:
Used when the external equipment provides one common clock signal, X.21, for both transmit and receive.
Internal: Used when the external device has no clocking.
Clocking will be provided by the MPS according to the
Internal
Clock Rate
settings.
DTR Puls, port 1-32
On:
Set to On if the port is used for incoming Gateway calls.
Off: Set to Off if the port is not used for incoming Gateway calls.
(Default: Off)
Gateway Bandwidth, port 1-32
The incoming connection Bandwidth may be set to:
64 kbps, 128 kbps, 192 kbps, 256 kbps, 320 kbps, 384 kbps, 512 kbps, 768 kbps, 1152 kbps, 1472 kbps, 1536 kbps and 1920 kbps (Default: 384 kbps).
This is for incoming Gateway calls and has no effect when used for MCU calls.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save
- Press the Save button to save changes.
Restrict, port 1-32
The port using internal clocking must match the Restrict-settings of the Internal Clock Rate.
On:
When set to On, call rates increments in steps of 56 kbps.
Off: When set to Off, call rates increments in steps of 64 kbps. (Default: Off)
100
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
>4?=?&:#*;2<1!'(#*
H.323 Configuration - Gatekeeper Settings for Net 1 and
Net 2
When dialling directly in to a conference from H.323, this requires the use of H.323 numbers. To achieve this the
TANDBERG MPS must be registered to a Gatekeeper.
Using the MPS
Gatekeeper: Set Gatekeeper to Gatekeeper to enable the
MPS to register to a Gatekeeper.
!"
The Gatekeeper IP Address must also be filled in.
!"
When registered, the H.323 Gatekeeper Status will show:
Registered, Gatekeeper’s IP address and the Port used
!"
Problems with registration will be shown as: Registering.
A Red alarm-symbol will be shown on the
Conference
Overview
page.
Direct: Set Gatekeeper to Direct if the MCU should not register to any Gatekeeper.
!"
The H.323 Gatekeeper Status will show: Inactive.
The Gatekeeper settings can be configured differently for
Network #1 and Network #2.
Gatekeeper IP Address
Enter the Gatekeeper IP Address that the MCU should register with.
Gatekeeper Status
H.323 Gatekeeper Status shows current status of Gatekeeper registration.
Authentication Mode
The Authentication Mode is set to Auto or Off in order to signal that the system supports Gatekeeper authentication or not.
The NTP must be configured on the IP configuration page if Authentication is to be used.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
Authentication ID / Authentication Password
The Authentication ID and the Authentication Password are used by a Gatekeeper to authenticate the system.
The system can be authenticated by one or more Gatekeepers.
101
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
5LI9&:#*;2<1!'(#*
SNMP Configuration
SNMP is used for monitoring and configuring different units in a network. The SNMP Agent responds to requests from
SNMP Managers (a PC program etc.). SNMP traps are generated by the agent to inform the manager about important events.
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
MIB
- Management Information Base
Using the MPS
SNMP Mode
On:
Set the SNMP Mode to On to enable the SNMP Agent.
This will enable generating of SNMP traps, and the ability to
Read and Write to the System MIB.
Off: Set the SNMP Mode to Off to disable the SNMP Agent.
This will disable generating of SNMP traps, and the MIB entries can neither be read nor written to.
Read Only:
When SNMP Mode is Read Only, SNMP traps are generated, and the system MIB can only be read, not written to.
Traps Only: When SNMP Mode is Traps Only, SNMP traps are generated, but the system MIB cannot be read or written to.
Community Name
SNMP Community names are used to authenticate SNMP requests. SNMP requests must have this ‘password’ in order to receive a response from the SNMP agent in the MCU.
NOTE!
The SNMP Community name is case sensitive.
System Contact
Used to identify the system contact via SNMP tools such as
TANDBERG Management Suite or HPOpenView.
System Location
Used to identify the system location via SNMP tools such as
TANDBERG Management Suite or HPOpenView.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
SNMP Host IP Address (1-3)
Identifies the IP-address of the SNMP manager.
!"
Up to three different SNMP Trap Hosts can be defined.
!"
Your LAN administrator should provide the correct values for these fields
102
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
589&:#*;2<1!'(#*
SIP Mode
On:
Set the SIP mode to On to enable the system for incoming and outgoing SIP calls.
Off: Set the SIP mode to Off to disable incoming and outgoing SIP calls from the system
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
NOTE : The DNS must be configured on the IP configuration page when using SIP
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Server Address
The Server Address is the manually configured address for the outbound proxy and registrar. It is possible to use a fully qualified domain name, or an IP address. The default port is 5060 for TCP and UDP, but another one can be provided.
Examples: sipserver.example.com
sipserver.example.com:5060
10.0.0.2
10.0.0.2:5060
Server Type
Set the correct SIP server type to let the MPS communicate with the SIP server. The following selections are available:
Auto, Nortel, Microsoft, Cisco, Alcatel, Experimental.
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
Authentication User Name / Authentication Password
This is the user name part and password part of the credentials used to authenticate toward the SIP Server.
Default Transport Protocol
Sets the default transport protocol towards the SIP server.
TCP: Set TCP as the default transport protocol.
UDP: Set UDP as the default transport protocol.
The most convenient transport protocol differs from server to server. i.e. when Server Type is set to “Nortel”, the transport default should be UDP, when set to “Microsoft LCS server” it should be TCP.
SIP Verify TL TLS
For TLS connections a CA-list can be uploaded from the web interface.
On: Set to On to verify TLS connections. Only TLS connections to servers, whom x.509 certificate is validated against the CA-list, will be allowed.
Off: Set to Off to allow TLS connections without verifying them. The TLS connections are allowed to be set up without verifying the x.509 certificate received from the server against the local CA-list. This should typically be selected if no SIP CA-list has been uploaded.
TLS (Transport Layer Security) - is a transport protocol used over LAN.
CA - Certificate authority, issuer of (root) certificates.
Current RFC’s and Drafts Supported
Read about the Current RFC’s and Drafts Supported for SIP in the Appendices section.
103
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
M#5&NM<!"('.�&5/1O()/P&:#*;2<1!'(#*
QoS Configuration (network 1-2)
The network must support Quality of Service (QoS) for these settings to work. You can configure the Quality of Service mode differently for Network #1 and Network #2.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
QoS Mode (network 1-2)
Precedence:
Select IP Precedence QoS method and see QoS
Mode Configuration for details.
Diffserv:
Select Diffserv QoS method and see QoS Mode
Configuration for details.
Off:
No QoS is used.
QoS Mode Configuration
!"
Diffserv is used to define which priority audio, video, data and signalling packets should have in an IP network. The priority ranges from 0 to 63 for each type of packets.
!"
Precedence
is used to define which priority audio, video, data and signalling should have in an IP network. The higher the number, the higher the priority. The priority ranges from 0 (Off) to 7 for each type of packets.
!"
In addition to Precedence, Type of Service can be used and enables the user to define what type of connection that should be chosen for the IP traffic. This helps a router select a routing path when multiple paths are available.
QoS Type of Service Priority
Minimum Delay:
Will choose a route where minimum delay is prioritized.
Maximum Throughput:
Will choose the route with highest bandwidth is prioritized.
Maximum Reliability:
Will choose the route where minimum packet loss is prioritized.
Minimum Cost:
Will choose the cheapest connection available.
Off:
Quality of Service not active.
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
104
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
I(%)/""!*/#<%&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Configuration - System name
To change the System Name of the TANDBERG MPS, enter the new system name in the <
System Name> field.
Using the MPS
Services
The IP services can be independently disabled to prevent access to the TANDBERG MPS.
HTTP
On: Set HTTP to On to enable HTTP Service.
Off:
Set HTTP to Off to disable HTTP Service.
HTTPS
On:
Set HTTPS to On to enable HTTPS Service.
Off: Set HTTPS to Off to disable HTTPS Service.
Telnet
On: Set Telnet to On to enable Telnet Service.
Off:
Set Telnet to Off to disable Telnet Service.
SSH (Secure Shell)
On:
Set SSH to On to enable SSH Service.
Off: Set SSH to Off to disable SSH Service.
Change Password
To change the password of the system, you need to log into the Command Line Interface. Read about the
API commands in the TANDBERG MPS API Guide.
Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs .
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
Restart
- For the settings to take effect the unit must be restarted after pressing the Save button.
105
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Software Upgrade
Software Upgrade
New software to the TANDBERG MPS can be installed via the
Software Upgrade web page.
The Software Upgrade page shows the current software version, the hardware serial number and the installed options and the option keys.
Using the MPS
Important - Before Upgrading
To upgrade the TANDBERG MPS, a valid Release Key and Software file is required. Please contact your
TANDBERG representative for more info.
System Information - Software Version: Shows the currently installed Software version.
System Information - Hardware Serial Number: Shows the unique hardware serial number of the TANDBERG MPS at hand. The TANDBERG MPS serial number must be provided when ordering a Software Upgrade.
System Information - Current Option Key:
Shows the current installed Option Keys.
Software Option - Add Option Key:
Enter the option key in the Key field and press ‘Add Option’. The system will validate the key. When validated, feel free to add more option keys in the same manner. However, to get the new options up and running, the TANDBERG MPS must be restarted. Please use the
Restart
button on the bottom of this page.
Install Software - Release Key:
Enter the release key in the
Key field and press ‘Install Software’. You will be presented with a new page where you select the software package file to upload.
V.35 Firmware Upgrade - Firmware Upgrade File:
Press
‘Browse’ to select the firmware upgrade file and press “Install Firmware” to proceed with the firmware upload.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
There are two different version of the TANDBERG MPS software file. One standard software file ( s41000jxx.
tar.gz), and one software file (s41001jxx.tar.gz) without Encryption (without AES and DES support).
For changes to take effect the unit must be restarted.
Restart
- Press the Restart button. This will restart the MPS.
106
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status
Q!*2<!2/R&5/'&Q!*2<!2/&!*D&Q!*2<!2/&;"/%
Set Language
The Set Language allows you to view and change the language in the web interface and dialogs.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Select Web Interface Language
Select the desired Web Interface Language and press Set to activate.
Select Dialog Language
Select the desired Dialog Language and press Set to activate.
File Management
The File Management allows viewing and changing pictures, sounds and symbols, which are shown to the participants when connecting to, and during a conference on the MPS.
Different files can be uploaded for different languages.
If you want to use files that are language independent,
see File Management in the MCU Configuration sec-
tion.
Manage Files for Language
Select the desired language for managing language dependent files only. Press the
Manage
button to activate.
Web Interface
The following web interface options can be specified:
!"
Language - Upload language file (MCU & GW).
!"
Value Space - Upload Value Space file (MCU & GW).
Both files should be uploaded for a given language.
To add a new file, press
Browse
to find the file, and then press Upload . For each customized file, a Delete button will be added in the Type column.
File
Press the name of the
File on the left side of the window to view or hear the content of the file.
Type
!"
When a customized file has been uploaded the text “Predefined file“ is replaced with a Delete button.
!"
When a customized file has been deleted the Delete button is replaced with the text “Predefined file“.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Browse
Press the Browse button to find a file.
Upload
Press the Upload button to upload the file.
107
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
Language, Files.., Dialog pictures
File Management
The File Management allows viewing and changing pictures, sounds and symbols, which are shown to the participants when connecting to, and during a conference on the MPS.
Different files can be uploaded for different languages.
If you want to use files that are language independent,
see File Management in the MCU Configuration sec-
tion.
Dialog Pictures
Examples of dialog pictures to be specified:
!"
Welcome Screen
!"
Gateway Call Proceeding
!"
GW Extension Enquire Screen
!"
Downspeeding In Progress
!"
Called Party
!"
Bandwidth
!"
Conference ID Create
!"
Conference ID Create No Match
!"
Downspeed
!"
Encryption
!"
Password Activate
!"
Password Create
!"
Password Enter
!"
Password Reject
!"
Ambigous Conference ID
!"
Now, Enter Conference ID
!"
Not Started Activate
!"
Not Started Wait
!"
Only Participant
To add a new file, press
Browse
to find the file, and then press Upload . For each of the customized files, a Delete button will be added in the Type column.
Allowed picture format:
JPEG (.jpg) files that are not gray scale and non-progressive coded.
Recommended maximum size is 352x288.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
File
Press the name of the
File on the left side of the window to view or hear the content of the file.
Type
!"
When a customized file has been uploaded the text “Predefined file“ is replaced with a Delete button.
!"
When a customized file has been deleted the Delete button is replaced with the text “Predefined file“.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Browse
Press the Browse button to find a file.
Upload
Press the Upload button to upload the file.
108
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status
Language, Files.., Dialog Sounds and Symbols
File Management
The File Management allows viewing and changing pictures, sounds and symbols, which are shown to the participants when connecting to, and during a conference on the MPS.
Different files can be uploaded for different languages.
If you want to use files that are language independent,
see File Management in the MCU Configuration sec-
tion.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Dialog Sounds
Examples of dialog sound to be specified:
!"
Welcome Sound
!"
Password Enquiry Sound
!"
Conference ID Create Sound
!"
Conference ID Create No Match Sound
!"
Downspeed Sound
!"
Encryption Sound
!"
Password Activate Sound
!"
Password Confirm Sound
!"
Password Create Sound
!"
Password Wrong Sound
!"
Password Activate Please Sound
!"
Ambigous Conference ID Sound
!"
Now, Enter Conference ID Sound
!"
Call Proceeding
!"
Extension Enquire Sound
!"
Not Started Activate
!"
Not Started Wait
!"
Only Participant
!"
Encrypt2
To add a new file, press
Browse
to find the file, and then press Upload . For each of the customized files, a Delete button will be added in the Type column.
Allowed sound format:
16bit 8kHz mono Wave (.wav) file.
Symbols
A Custom Logo can be specified:
!"
Recommended size is 64 x 64 pixels
!"
The MPS must be restarted to display the Custom Logo
!"
The Custom Logo will be presented in the upper left corners on all conferences hosted by the MPS. This logo can be used to identify/verify the MPS hosting the conference.
The logo will not be present in conferences which have enabled and are using optimal Voice Switch, oVS.
To add a new file, press Browse to find the file, and then press
Upload
. For each of the customized files, a
Delete
button will be added in the Type column.
109
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
:#*;2<1!'(#*&<%(*2&SIQ
XML Document
The XML Uploading page, allows administrators to upload multiple configuration changes to the MPS instead of manually setting each entry through the web interface.
By pasting in a valid xml file, users may update the MPS
Directory and Configuration. It is also possible to execute commands by pasting in valid command xml.
Max size approx. 150 lines
For longer XML strings, use a normal HTTP POST towards http://MPS-IP/putxml with the body being the raw XML document.
The header “Content-Type” must be set to “text/xml” for correct processing.
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Example: Text is copied from the command.xml file and pasted into the XML Document editor field.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
The required XML format for Directories, Configuration and
Commands can be found at the following locations: http://<MPS IP Address>/command.xml
http://<MPS IP Address>/directory.xml
http://<MPS IP Address>/configuration.xml
If the MPS is configured for HTTPS: https://<MPS IP Address>/command.xml
https://<MPS IP Address>/directory.xml
https://<MPS IP Address>/configuration.xml
Using the XML Document
1.
Open the XML file, for example command.xml
2.
Copy text from the XML file
3.
Paste text into the XML Document editor field
4.
Make the desired changes
5.
Press the Save button to activate the changes
Some configuration changes may require a restart of the MPS to take effect.
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
110
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
:/1'(;)!'/&I!*!2/3/*'
Manage Certificates
Allows an administrator to upload X.509 certificates for use with HTTPS. These certificates can be created from any trusted CA (Certificate Authority) to prevent possible security warnings in the web browser due to the default self signed certificate.
Using the MPS
To install an HTTPS certificate, the following is needed:
!"
The HTTPS certificate (.PEM format)
!"
ROOT Certificate (.PEM format, optional)
!"
The Private key (.PEM format)
!"
The Passphrase (optional)
NOTE - Although a Passphrase is optional; if the certificate was created using a passphrase then the passphrase must be entered to make use of the certificate.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Browse - Press the Browse button to locate the HTTPS certificate and Private key.
Upload
- Press the Upload button to upload the HTTPS certificate, Private key and Passphrase (if used).
NOTE - The MPS must be restarted for the new certificate to take affect.
111
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Chapter 6
Gateway configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
The Gateway Configuration section contains information about how to configure and use the
Gateway on the TANDBERG MPS. Reading this section makes you familiarize yourself with the configuration menu and functions important for the correct configuration and functioning of the
Gateway. You will also find examples of setting up Dialling Rules on the Gateway with different types of network configuration.
Stay up-to-date
We recommend you visit the TANDBERG web site regularly for an updated version of this guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs
In this chapter...
Gateway Functionality and Dialling Rules
Examples of dialling rules with ISDN Gateway
Examples of dialling rules with V.35 Gateway
Examples of dialling rules with G.703 Gateway
112
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status
Gateway Functionality and Dialling Rules
How to enable Gateway Funtionality
In order to enable the Gateway functionality in the
MPS, the Gateway Software option must be set.
Dialling Rules
The dialling rules must be set in order for the
MPS to handle different types of Gateway calls. The different Gateway call types supported by the MPS are described below.
Gateway Software Option
The software option key is set in the web interface, see the
System Configuration > Upgrade section.
About the Option Key
An option key for the Gateway can be obtained through the regular TANDBERG channels. The option key states how many Gateway sessions the
MPS is able to run in parallel.
DID
Direct Inward Dialling (DID) will provide you with direct Dial In numbers for your endpoints.
DID will do a direct mapping between your
ISDN number and the H.323 E.164
Alias. If you have assigned a range of ISDN numbers to your ISDN PRI line, each ISDN number will map to a single IP endpoint.
Gateway Sessions
A Gateway session requires 2 ports (one for the source side and one for the destination side), thus making 80 the maximum number of Gateway sessions for the MPS 800. For MPS 200 the maximum is 20 sessions.
We recommend that if more than one
PRI line is used all PRI lines should have a common number range, see
Trunk Groups in the PRI Board Configu-
ration section.
Gateway Calls Overview
Once the correct option key for the Gateway is entered (and the system restarted), the web interface will include a Gateway Calls Overview page, see the
Overview > Gateway Calls Overview
section.
Gateway Configuration
Once the correct option key for the Gateway is entered (and the system restarted), an extra tab for Gateway Configuration will also be added to the web interface.
Example with DID:
1.
A DID dialling rule exists that maps the
PRI number range from 67124000 to
67124050 to the H.323 E.164
Alias range 94000 - 94050.
2.
To call an IP endpoint with H.323 E.164
Alias 94020 from ISDN, dial the ISDN
*<3T/1&UH6=AE=E4&V&WX/&G!'/$!.&%'!1'%& the call to the IP endpoint and the “Call proceeding” picture and sound are initiated to your endpoint.
3.
When the call is connected audio and video are transmitted through the Gateway.
For further information about endpoint support of TCS-4 see the MXP Administrator’s
Guide on http://www.tandberg.com/docs .
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
IVR Services
Interactive Voice Response (IVR), also called extension Dial In, provides you with a single
Dial In number. The caller uses telephone tones (DTMF) to enter the extension address of the endpoint to be called. It is an automated answering system that directs the call to the endpoint indicated by the caller.
IVR is useful when you have limited PRI numbers on your PRI line.
Example with IVR:
1.
A video conferencing system calls into the Extension Dial In number of an IVR service.
2.
The Gateway activates the ‘Welcome’ picture and sound.
3.
The user of a video conferencing system enters the extension (H.323 E.164
Alias) followed by the # (pound-sign).
4.
The Gateway starts to call the IP endpoint and the “Call proceeding” picture and sound are activated.
5.
When the call is connected, the audio and video are transmitted through the
Gateway.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
IVR + TCS-4
This call type is the same as described in IVR but extended by an additional method, the
TCS-4, to signal the extension address to the
Gateway. In this mode the extension number can be indicated with IVR or with TCS-4 signalling.
TCS-4 allows an H.320 based videoconferencing endpoint (ISDN, V.35, V.35RS366 and
G.703) to dial an IP endpoint directly, without having to (manually) enter the extension number by DTMF. The endpoint will send the extension number as a TCS-4 signal to the
Gateway. If no TCS-4 extension is sent from the endpoint, then IVR will be used.
To use TCS-4, it needs to be supported by the video conferencing system. .
Example with IVR + TCS-4:
1.
A video conferencing system calls into the
Extension Dial In number of an IVR + TCS-
4 service, using <Dial In number of this service>*<extension number>.
2.
The Gateway starts to call the IP endpoint and the “Call proceeding” picture and sound are activated.
3.
When the call is connected audio and video are transmitted through the Gateway.
4.
TANDBERG endpoints allow storing the complete dial string in the Phone Book to automate dial through.
113
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
G!'/$!.&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Dialling Rules
Add new Dialling Rule
1.
Configure the new Dialling Rule from the row on top
2.
Press the
Add New
button to activate the dialling rule
3.
The new rule is added as the Rule #1 in the list
Modify an existing Dialling Rule
1.
Locate the Dialling Rule to be modified (1, 2, 3, etc.)
2.
Modify the Dialling Rule and press the
Save
button to activate the modified Dialling Rule
Using the MPS System status
Delete a Dialling Rule
1.
Locate the Dialling Rule to be deleted (1, 2, 3, etc.)
2.
Press the
Delete
button
Order of Dialling Rules
The rules are processed in the order they appear in the list. Rule #1 is first and Rule #2 next, etc.
In cases where the order of rules matters, make sure they are added in the right order. A new rule is added on top as Rule #1.
Number of Dialling Rules
There is no limitation in the MPS as to how many
Dialling rules you want to set up.
However, bear in mind that the total number of registrations on the Gatekeeper can be limited.
For further information about endpoint support of TCS-4 see the MXP Administrator’s
Guide on http://www.tandberg.com/docs .
Type
DID
- Direct Inward Dialling
IVR - Interactive Voice Response
IVR-TCS4
- IVR and TCS-4 Service
Bandwidth
This value sets the maximum call rate for the given Gateway service: Telephone, 64 kbps, 128 kbps, 192 kbps, 256 kbps, 384 kbps, 512 kbps,
768 kbps, 1152 kbps, 1472 kbps, 1920 kbps.
Number of Significant Digits
Specify the number of significant digits of the incoming number that should be used to:
!"
Do a rule matching
!"
Generate an outgoing number
Setting this field to 0 (zero) will make the
Gateway check the complete incoming number for rule matching.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
From Network Type -
The call type on for incoming calls. Supported call types:
H.323, ISDN, V.35, V.35RS366 and
G.703 (leased line).
From Prefix -
This setting instructs what to match on the incoming call. The significant number of digits is applied on the input, before matching From Prefixes.
Add New
Adds a new dialling rule to the list below and activates the new dialling rule.
!
Take care! Pressing the Add New button will create a new Dialling Rule at the top of the list. In cases where the order of the Dialling Rules matters, this may affect those calls, see Example
#1 on next page.
To Network Type - The call type on the destination side. Supported call types:
H.323, ISDN, V.35, V.35RS366 and
G.703 (leased line).
To Prefix - The To Prefix is used to append a number to the matched number (now without the From Prefix). The To Prefix will be first in the outgoing dialled number from the Gateway.
Save
Press the
Save
button to save changes to a
Dialling Rule.
Delete
Press the Delete button to delete a Dialling
Rule.
!
Take care! No warning will appear.
114
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Add Dialling Rule
1.
Set
Type
to
DID
2.
Select
Bandwidth
3.
Set Number of Significant Digits to 8
4.
Set
From Network Type
to
ISDN
5.
Set
From Prefix
to
6712
6.
Set To Network Type to H.323
7.
Leave
To Prefix
empty
Using the MPS System status Contents
G!'/$!.&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
Examples of dialling rules with ISDN Gateway
Example with DID
Your ISDN PRI number range for the Gateway is from
67124000
to
67124050
.
Your IP endpoints have the numbers (H.323
E.164
Alias) in the range
4000
-
4050
.
Example with IVR-TCS4
Your ISDN PRI number for Gateway usage is
67124000
.
Add Dialling Rule
1.
Set
Type
to
IVR-TCS4
2.
Select Bandwidth
3.
Set Number of Significant Digits to 8
4.
Set
From Network Type
to
ISDN
5.
Set From Prefix to 67124000
6.
Set To Network Type to H.323
7.
Leave
To Prefix
empty
To call an IP endpoint with H.323 E.164
Alias 4020 from ISDN, dial the ISDN number
67124000*4020.
To call an IP endpoint with H.323 E.164
Alias 4020 from ISDN, dial the ISDN number
67124020.
The Order of Dialling Rule Matters
To be able to do “empty” incoming prefix matching as the example above, this Dialling
Rule must be the first that is added to the mapping rules database. If not, this rule will match with any other prior added dial in rules.
The notation to separate the ISDN number from the extension by ‘*’ is only available on certain types of endpoints. Consult the endpoint documentation to find out if and how
TCS-4 is supported.
Using IVR instead
If you want to use IVR instead dial 67124000 and enter ‘4020#’ using DTMF.
If you want your IP endpoints to have numbers in the range 94000 – 94050
!"
Set To Prefix to 9 instead
H.323 to ISDN Gateway
It is also possible to configure an H.323 to
ISDN Gateway.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Example with DID:
The GW shall be configured to have an H.323 prefix 0047.
Add Dialling Rule
1.
Set
Type
to
DID
2.
Select Bandwidth
3.
Set Number of Significant Digits to 0
4.
Set
From Network Type
to
H.323
5.
Set From Prefix to 0047
6.
Set To Network Type to ISDN
7.
Leave
To Prefix
empty
To call an ISDN endpoint with ISDN number
67141234 from H.323, dial the number
004767141234.
Setting the Gateway’s Dial In number to 0047 will make the Gatekeeper route all H.323 calls to an E.164 alias starting with 0047 to this
Gateway.
!"
This means that all other equipment has to be configured with an E.164 alias that doesn’t start with 0047.
!"
Exceptions to this rule are other Gateways to perform load balancing.
Example with IVR:
The GW shall be configured to have an H.323
Dial In number 1.
Add Dialling Rule
1.
Set Type to IVR
2.
Select
Bandwidth
3.
Set
Number of Significant Digits
to
0
4.
Set From Network Type to H.323
5.
Set
From Prefix
to
1
6.
Set To Network Type to ISDN
7.
Leave To Prefix empty
To call an ISDN endpoint with ISDN number
67141234 from H.323, dial 1 and enter
‘67141234#’ using DTMF.
Dialling rules for telephone connections are set up accordingly, with
Bandwidth
set to
Telephone .
For further information about endpoint support of TCS-4 see the MXP Administrator’s Guide on http://www.tandberg.
com/docs .
The J3 software and above supports
ISDN to H.323 Gateway.
115
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Range will therefore be 0101 to 0632 for corresponding V.35 cards/modules in slot 1 port
1 to slot 6 port 32.
Using the MPS System status Contents
G!'/$!.&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
Examples of dialling rules with V.35 Gateway
V.35 Ports
To address the V.35 ports in a dialling rule, the physical V.35 ports have a numeric representation with two digits for each the interface number and module number.
Make sure that this string always contains 4 digits.
Example with DID:
You would like to have a DID number from
H.323 to a V.35 port.
Add Dialling Rule
1.
Set
Type
to
DID
2.
Select
Bandwidth
3.
Set Number of Significant Digits to empty or to
0
(zero)
4.
Set From Network Type to H.323
5.
Set
From Prefix
to
9
6.
Set
To Network Type
to
V.35
7.
Leave To Prefix empty
Example:
Slot 1 & Port 1: 0101
Slot 1 & Port 2: 0102
Slot 1 & Port 3: 0103
....
Slot 1 & Port 30: 0130
Slot 1 & Port 31: 0131
Slot 1 & Port 32: 0132
To call a V.35 port 1 on module card 1, would require you to dial 90101 from the H.323 endpoint.
Slot 6 & Port 1: 0601
Slot 6 & Port 2: 0602
Slot 6 & Port 3: 0603
....
Slot 6 & Port 30: 0630
Slot 6 & Port 31: 0631
Slot 6 & Port 32: 0632
Configure Incoming V.35 Gateway
It is also possible to configure an incoming
V.35 gateway.
!"
This can be setup as a V.35 DID or a V.35
IVR service.
!"
In the case of setting up an IVR service, make sure that your V.35 peripheral equipment supports DTMF relaying.
For further information about endpoint support of TCS-4 see the MXP Administrator’s Guide on http://www.tandberg.
com/docs .
The J3 software and above supports
H.323 to V.35 Gateway.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Example with DID (V.35 to H.323)
You would like to have a DID number from a
V.35 port to a specific H.323 endpoint.
Add Dialling Rule
1.
Set
Type
to
DID
2.
Select Bandwidth
3.
Set Number of Significant Digits to empty
4.
Set
From Network Type
to
V.35
5.
Set From Prefix to 0102
6.
Set To Network Type to H.323
7.
Set
To Prefix
to
55013
Make sure the Bandwidth selected matches the bandwidth of the V.35 port.
This would set up a Gateway call between the
V.35 0102 port, to the H.323 endpoint, with alias 55013.
It is recommended not to use the same
V.35 port for MCU calls and for Gateway calls because the support for incoming
V.35 Gateway might conflict with the
MCU V.35 setup.
The Gateway does only support H.320 to H.323 Gateway calls. There is no functionality to support Gateway routing internally within H.320 protocols (ISDN,
V.35 and Leased Line).
It is recommended to set DTR pulse to
On in the Serial V.35 configuration page for each port to be used for V.35 to
H.323 Gateway calls.
Example with DID:
You would like to have a DID number from
H.323 to a specific V.35 card.
Add Dialling Rule
1.
Set
Type
to
DID
2.
Select
Bandwidth
3.
Set Number of Significant Digits to empty
4.
Set
From Network Type
to
H.323
5.
Set From Prefix to 9
6.
Set To Network Type to V.35
7.
Set
To Prefix
to
01
To call V.35 port 4 on the already defined module card 1 would require you to dial 904 from the H.323 endpoint.
The To Prefix of 01 defines the use of
Network Module 1 so this does not need to be included in the H.323 dial string.
116
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
G!'/$!.&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
Examples of dialling rules with G.703 Gateway
G.703 Ports:
To address the G.703 ports in a dialling rule the physical G.703 ports have a numeric representation with two digits for each the interface number and the module number as well as a one digit representation for the call number.
Make sure that this string always contains 5 digits.
Range will therefore be 01011 to 06085 for corresponding G.703 cards/modules in slot 1 port 1 call 1 to slot 6 port 8 call 5.
Using the MPS System status
Example with DID:
You would like to have a DID number from
H.323 to G.703.
Add Dialling Rule
1.
Set
Type
to
DID
2.
Select Bandwidth
3.
Set Number of Significant Digits to empty or to
0
(zero)
4.
Set From Network Type to H.323
5.
Set
From Prefix
to
9
6.
Set
To Network Type
to
G.703
7.
Leave To Prefix empty
Example:
Slot 1 Port 1 Call 1: 01011
Slot 1 Port 1 Call 2: 01012
Slot 1 Port 1 Call 3: 01013
....
Slot 1 Port 8 Call 3: 01083
Slot 1 Port 8 Call 4: 01084
Slot 1 Port 8 Call 5: 01085
To call G.703 call 1 on port 1 on module card
1 would require you to dial 901011 from the
H.323 endpoint.
Slot 6 Port 1 Call 1: 06011
Slot 6 Port 1 Call 2: 06012
Slot 6 Port 1 Call 3: 06013
....
Slot 6 Port 8 Call 3: 06083
Slot 6 Port 8 Call 4: 06084
Slot 6 Port 8 Call 5: 06085
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Example with DID:
You would like to have a DID number from
H.323 to a specific G.703 card.
Add Dialling Rule
1.
Set
Type
to
DID
2.
Select Bandwidth
3.
Set Number of Significant Digits to empty or to
0
(zero)
4.
Set From Network Type to H.323
5.
Set
From Prefix
to
9
6.
Set
To Network Type
to
G.703
7.
Set To Prefix to 01
To call G.703 call 3 on port 2 on module card
1 would require you to dial 9023 from the
H.323 endpoint.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Example with DID:
You would like to have a DID number from
H.323 to a specific G.703 call.
Add Dialling Rule
1.
Set
Type
to
DID
2.
Select Bandwidth
3.
Set Number of Significant Digits to empty or to
0
(zero)
4.
Set From Network Type to H.323
5.
Set
From Prefix
to
9
6.
Set
To Network Type
to
G.703
7.
Set To Prefix to 01062
To call G.703 call 2 on port 6 on module card
1 would require you to dial 9 from the H.323 endpoint.
For further information about endpoint support of TCS-4 see the MXP Administrator’s Guide on http://www.tandberg.
com/docs .
The J3 software and above supports
H.323 to G.703 Gateway.
117
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
G!'/$!.&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
Gateway Settings
Interoperability
Experience has shown that some features - even though they are standardized - might cause interoperability problems with legacy video conferencing products.
By disabling features on this page, the Gateway can be used as a filter to ensure interoperability with legacy products.
Using the MPS
When receiving a call with the Gateway configured with only one number in the PRI number range, all other incoming calls will be blocked until the ongoing call is established.
This is because the network will have no additional number available for the second call while setting up the call.
When the call is established the number will be available and any incoming call will connect as normal.
Natural Video
On: Set to On to allow video formats and capabilities such as interlaced video (iCIF/iSIF) to be transmitted through the
Gateway.
Off:
When set to Off no interlaced video capabilities will be transmitted.
Custom Video Formats
On: Set to On to allow H.263 custom video formats and capabilities such as SIF, 4SIF and VGA resolution to be transmitted through the gateway.
Off:
When set to Off no H.263 custom video formats or capabilities will be transmitted.
Dual Video Stream (DuoVideo
TF
/H.239)
On: Set to On to allows an additional video stream to be transmitted through the gateway using DuoVideo
TF
or the
H.239 protocols.
Off:
When disabled no DuoVideo
TF
, H.239 capabilities will be transmitted.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
118
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
G!'/$!.&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
Gateway Settings
Interoperability
Experience has shown that some features - even though they are standardized - might cause interoperability problems with legacy video conferencing products.
By disabling features on this page, the Gateway can be used as a filter to ensure interoperability with legacy products.
Using the MPS
Encryption
The Gateway will allow DES and AES 128 encrypted Gateway calls to take place. Encryption can operate in two modes.
Transparent: When set to Transparent, the Gateway will forward the encryption modes of the connected devices transparently. The encryption modes seen on each side of the Gateway are similar. The Gateway will only encrypt calls if both sides support encryption. The settings for H.320 and
H.323 does not have any meaning in this mode.
Independent:
When set to Independent, the Gateway will use the settings made for the H.320 (ISDN) and H.323 (IP) side. The encryption modes on each side of the Gateway are independent of each other. One endpoint might show that the call is encrypted while the other endpoint shows an unencrypted call.
H.320 and H.323
On:
Encryption is required. Gateway connection is only established if encryption can be established on this side.
Off:
No encryption. Gateway connection will be established without any encryption on this side.
Auto:
Use encryption if available. Gateway will try to establish an encrypted connection, the connection will be established regardsless if encryption on this side is available.
External Crypto Device
A typical application of this feature is when an external crypto device is used on the ISDN interface. In this case an administrator may want to set the Gateway’s encryption on the H.320 side to Off and on the H.323 side to On.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
119
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
G!'/$!.&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
Gateway Settings
Interoperability
Experience has shown that some features - even though they are standardized - might cause interoperability problems with legacy video conferencing products.
By disabling features on this page, the Gateway can be used as a filter to ensure interoperability with legacy products.
Using the MPS
H.264
On:
Set to On to allow H.264 video capabilities to be transmitted through the Gateway.
Off: When set to Off no H.264 video capabilities will be transmitted.
Percent of Total Bandwidth
This setting defines the percentage of H.320 bandwidth that is dedicated to be used by the Gateway.
The default value is 0%
!"
If this value is set to 0 (zero) %, the Gateway will not have any H.323 resources available (same as actually disabling the Gateway).
!"
If this value is set to
100
(hundred) %, no Gateway calls will be refused as long as the MPS has resources available.
!"
However, using the value 100% will make it possible to use all bandwidth resources for Gateway calls not leaving any resources for MCU calls.
Load Limit
When the Resource Usage reaches the Load Limit, the Gateway will signal this state to the Gatekeeper. The Gatekeeper can then try to route IP/H.323 calls to other Gateways.
When using multiple Gateways this will maintain availability for incoming ISDN calls.
The value is set from
0
% to
100
%. Default value is 100 %
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
120
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
G!'/$!.&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
Gateway Settings
Interoperability
Experience has shown that some features - even though they are standardized - might cause interoperability problems with legacy video conferencing products.
By disabling features on this page, the Gateway can be used as a filter to ensure interoperability with legacy products.
Using the MPS
Far End Telephone Echo Surpression
Analogue telephone lines, speaker phones and telephone headsets may all cause echoes. The Far End Telephone
Echo Suppression function eliminates some – or all – of the experienced echo.
Off:
Set to Off to disable Far End Telephone Echo Suppression.
Normal:
Weak echoes are removed with the Normal setting enabled.
High:
Strong echoes are removed with the High setting enabled.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Save - Press the Save button to save changes.
121
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Chapter 7
MCU configuration
The MCU Configuration section contains information about how to configure and use the MCU on the TANDBERG MPS. Reading this section makes you familiarize yourself with the configuration menu and functions important for the correct configuration and functioning of the
MCU. You will also find information on how to configure dial in numbers for different types of conferences and about conference templates and file management.
Stay up-to-date
We recommend you visit the TANDBERG web site regularly for an updated version of this guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs
In this chapter...
The Dial-In Numbers menu overview
The Single Dial-In Number menu
The Direct AdHoc Conferences menu
Conference Template Configuration
122
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*
The Dial-In Numbers menu overview
In the
Dial In Numbers
page you can configure numbers and/or aliases to create a conference and to dial into an already created conference.
There are different ways of configuring and setting up a conference depending on conference type and use.
Conferences can be created and started from the web interface or by dialling into the MPS, with or without a create password and access password.
The participants may be put in a Waiting Room for a predefined period until the conference starts and may have a limited number of login attempts for accessing the conference.
The TANDBERG MPS 800 (200) supports up to 40
(10) simultaneous conferences.
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Static Conferences
The Static Conferences configuration allows the users to define numbers and aliases for each conference on the MPS.
The conference is created from the web interface of the MPS.
See Static Conferences for details.
Single Dial In Number
The Single Dial In Number enables users to set up multiple conferences in an Ad Hoc manner using one single number to the MPS. By calling one single number into the MPS the user may:
!"
Create a new conference on the fly
!"
Access an already created conference
!"
Be put on hold until a conference is created
- all by following the instructions on-screen on the videoconference system and by using the touch tones
(DTMF) on the remote control.
Each conference may have a Create password and
Access Password associated to the conference.
Note that
Static
,
Personal
and
Direct Ad Hoc conferences may be accessed, but not created through the
Single Dial In Number
.
See
Single Dial In Number for Ad Hoc Conferences
for details.
Personal Conferences
The Personal Conferences enables users to configure personal conferences with a fixed unique number and/or alias to dial into.
The creation of each conference can be password protected and a name can be associated to the conference.
for details.
Direct Ad Hoc Conferences
The Direct Ad Hoc field allows the user to configure their own conference based on a predefined prefix.
The conference is created by dialling a prefix followed by a user defined number and the conference participants call the same number to access the conference.
for details.
123
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
The Single Dial-In Number menu
The
Single Dial In Number
allows the MPS to set up multiple conferences, in an Ad Hoc manner. This is triggered by a user dialling in to a single number. The MPS will then provide a set of services that enables a user to:
!"
Create a new conference on the fly
!"
Access an already created conference
!"
Put on hold until a conference is created
In the Ad Hoc Conferences table Create Passwords, Access passwords and desired templates may be specified for a each conference.
Using the MPS
Note that Static, Personal and Direct Ad Hoc conferences may be accessed, but not created through the
Single Dial In Number.
Active
To make the configurations for Single Dial In Number functionality to take effect the Active setting must be set to On.
On: Set to On to enable the Single Dial In Number functionality.
Off: Set to Off to disable Single Dial In Number functionality.
Number of Login Attempts
Limits the number of login attempts a user may have to access a conference. Enter a number from
1
to
10
.
Waiting Room Timer
When users dials into a conference which is not started the users are placed in a virtual waiting room (put on hold). The
Waiting Room Timer limits the time (in minutes) a user may be placed in the waiting room.
Enter a value between 1 and 60. The default value is 10 minutes.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Enter the numbers to be used:
ISDN:
The ISDN Single Dial In Number must be a valid PRI number of the TANDBERG MPS at hand.
IP: The IP address for Single Dial In Number must be a valid IP address on the TANDBERG MPS System Controller
Card.
E.164 Alias: The E.164 Alias is a numeric H.323 E.164 Single Dial In Number. The TANDBERG MPS must be registered to a Gatekeeper.
H.323 ID: The H.323 ID is a alphanumeric H.323 ID Single Dial In Number. The TANDBERG MPS must be registered to a Gatekeeper.
SIP URI: The SIP URI is a alphanumeric SIP URI Single Dial In Number. The TANDBERG MPS must be connected to a SIP proxy.
Create Password
On:
Off: If set to Off, select the Conference Template to be used from the drop down list.
124
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
The AdHoc Conferences menu
The
Single Dial In Number
allows the MPS to set up multiple conferences, in an Ad Hoc manner. This is triggered by a user dialling in to a single number. The MPS will then provide a set of IVR services that enables a user to:
!"
Create a new conference on the fly
!"
Access an already created conference
!"
Put on hold until a conference is created
In the Ad Hoc Conferences table Create Passwords, Access passwords and desired templates may be specified for a each conference.
Using the MPS
Note that Static, Personal and Direct Ad Hoc conferences may be accessed, but not created through the
Single Dial In Number.
Ad Hoc Conferences
The Ad Hoc Conferences works in conjunction with the configuration of Single Dial In Number and may be used when
setting is set to On.
Create Password
The Create Password is used to authenticate the creator of the conference.
When you define more than one Create Password, please make sure the Create Password is unique.
This is a static password used to authenticate the owner of the the conference when the conference is created, and hence should not be distributed to anyone else than the conference owner.
If a Create Password is set, the first participant must be authenticated as the owner when dialling into the conference.
If the field is left blank, there will be no authentication on the conference. The password must consist of numbers only as it is entered by using DTMF on the remote control when creating/accessing the conference.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Access Password
The Access Password is used to authenticate the particpants in a conference and is defined by the creator of the conference.
This field is only enabled when you have defined a
Create Password.
Template
Up to 20 conferences may be defined in the conference list, one with Access Password and one without Access Password, for each of the 10 templates. You can also select the same template severeal times.
Select which template you would like the conference to use.
Add New: Press the Add New button to add a new item to the conference list.
True: If the Access Password is set to True, the creator is asked to provide a conference password, valid only for the conference at hand. Other participants in this conference must be informed on this password, to be able to access the conference.
False:
If Access Password is set to False, the conference will not have any authentication.
Save
Press the
Save
button to save changes to your configuration.
Delete
Select a configuration from the list and press the Delete button to remove the selected configuration from the conference list.
125
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
The Static Conferences menu
The
Static Conferences configuration allows the users to define prefixes, ISDN numbers, E.164 Aliases, H.323 ID’s and SIP URI’s for each conference on the MPS.
The number of conferences in the Static Conferences list correspond to the number of conferences in the Overview >
MCU panel.
How to get access to a Static Conference
The conference must be created and started from the web interface of the MPS.
The participants can access a Static Conference by dialling a single number using the definitions in the Static Conferences, like ISDN, E.164 Alias, H.323 ID and SIP URI as the conference ID.
Waiting Room
When users dials into a conference which is not started the users are placed in a virtual waiting room (put on hold) for a predefined period of time until the conference starts.
The predefined period of time is defined in the Waiting Room
Timer setting found under the Single Dial In Number configu-
ration.
Using the MPS
DID H.323 ID Prefix
The prefix value to be used together with H.323 ID numbers.
The prefix will be registered on the connected Gatekeeper.
(DID - Dial In Direct)
DID E.164 Alias Prefix
The prefix value to be used together with E.164 Alias numbers. The prefix will be registered on the connected Gatekeeper.
Note that the DID H.323 ID Prefix and DID E.164 Alias
Prefix are only used for adding extra dial in numbers for each conference.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
E.164 Aliases
The H.323 E.164 numeric alias for each conference.
The TANDBERG MPS must be registered to a Gatekeeper.
H.323 ID
The H.323 alphanumeric ID for each conference.
SIP URI
The SIP alphanumeric URI for each conference.
The TANDBERG MPS must be registered to a Gatekeeper.
The TANDBERG MPS must be connected to a SIP proxy.
ISDN
The ISDN number must be a valid PRI number of the TANDBERG MPS at hand.
126
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
The Static Conferences menu
The
Static Conferences configuration allows the users to define prefixes, ISDN numbers, E.164 Aliases, H.323 ID’s and SIP URI’s for each conference on the MPS.
The number of conferences in the Static Conferences list correspond to the number of conferences in the Overview >
MCU panel.
How to get access to a Static Conference
The conference must be created and started from the web interface of the MPS.
The participants can access a Static Conference by dialling a single number using the definitions in the Static Conferences, like ISDN, E.164 Alias, H.323 ID and SIP URI as the conference ID.
Waiting Room
When users dials into a conference which is not started the users are placed in a virtual waiting room (put on hold) for a predefined period of time until the conference starts.
The predefined period of time is defined in the Waiting Room
Timer setting found under the Single Dial In Number configu-
ration.
Using the MPS
MultiWay Gatekeeper E.164 Alias Prefix
(removed from the web interface)
The H.323 E.164 numeric alias prefix for non-encrypted MultiWay (beta) is removed from the web interface. Works with
F7.x and TANDBERG GW MultiWay (beta) only.
The setting is still available from the API using the command: xConfiguration PrefixDialIn Gatekeeper
H323Alias
MultiWay Gatekeeper Encrypted E.164 Alias Prefix
(removed from the web interface)
The H.323 E.164 numeric alias prefix for encrypted MultiWay
(beta) is removed from the web interface. Works with F7.x and TANDBERG GW MultiWay (beta) only.
The setting is still available from the API using the command: xConfiguration PrefixDialIn Gatekeeper
H323EncryptedAlias
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
E.164 Aliases
The H.323 E.164 numeric alias for each conference.
The TANDBERG MPS must be registered to a Gatekeeper.
H.323 ID
The H.323 alphanumeric ID for each conference.
SIP URI
The SIP alphanumeric URI for each conference.
The TANDBERG MPS must be registered to a Gatekeeper.
The TANDBERG MPS must be connected to a SIP proxy.
ISDN
The ISDN number must be a valid PRI number of the TANDBERG MPS at hand.
127
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
The Personal Conferences menu
The
Personal Conferences allows you to specify one or more conferences with:
!"
Unique name
!"
Unique numbers and/or aliases
!"
Passwords
!"
Conference Template
When the personal conference is started, the participants defined in the Edit Participants configuration setup will automatically be called (excluding the starting participant himself if the incoming number is the same as the specified participant number).
This will ensure that the owner of the conference, or one or more other participants, always are called when someone is starting a personal conference.
Using the MPS
Personal H.323 ID Prefix Number
Enter the prefix value to be used together with Personal conferences with H.323 ID numbers.
The prefix is registered on the connected Gatekeeper and must be entered before H.323 ID.
Personal E.164 Alias Prefix Number
Enter the prefix value to be used together with Personal conferences with H.323 E.164 Alias numbers.
The prefix is registered on the connected Gatekeeper and must be entered before E.164 Alias.
Add New Personal Conference
Fill in the required fields and press the
Add New
button to add a new Personal Conference configuration.
Name
Enter a Name to identify the the Personal Conference. This could be any text string.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Multiple Numbers
In the conference configuration you can define one or more numbers (H.320, E.164, H.323 or SIP) which will be used for dial in to a conference.
E.164 Alias
In this field, a unique numeric E.164 alias should be entered. Note that it is the corresponding Personal E.164
Alias Prefix that is registered to the Gatekeeper.
SIP URI
In this field, a unique SIP URI for the conference could be entered. You must be able to configure the SIP proxy to forward certain SIP URI to the MPS. Note that the full
SIP URI should be entered and that functionality may be limited depending on the SIP server.
H.323 ID
In this field, a unique alphanumeric H.323 ID should be entered. Note that it is the corresponding Personal
H.323 ID Prefix that is registered to the Gatekeeper.
ISDN Number
To be able to use ISDN numbers, make sure you have a
PRI interface Card, available ISDN options and use only free numbers in your assigned PRI range.
128
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
The Personal Conferences menu
The
Personal Conferences allows you to specify one or more conferences with:
!"
Unique name
!"
Unique numbers and/or aliases
!"
Passwords
!"
Conference Template
When the personal conference is started, the participants defined in the Edit Participants configuration setup will automatically be called (excluding the starting participant himself if the incoming number is the same as the specified participant number).
This will ensure that the owner of the conference, or one or more other participants, always are called when someone is starting a personal conference.
Using the MPS
Add New Personal Conference
Fill in the required fields and press the
Add New
button to add a new Personal Conference configuration.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Password Protection
The creation of each conference can be password protected as well as accessing the conference.
When a participant is dialling into a personal conference, which requires a Create Password and that is currently not started, the participant will be asked to start the conference with the create password or wait until it starts. The participant will automatically be connected when the conference is started.
No Password Protection
If no Create Password has been defined, the conference will start immediately when a participant calls in.
Create Password
The Create Password is used to authenticate the creator of the conference.
This is a static password used to authenticate the owner of the the conference when the conference is created, and hence should not be distributed to anyone else than the conference owner.
If a Create Password is set, the first participant must be authenticated as the owner when dialling into the conference. If the field is left blank, there will be no authentication on the conference.
The password must consist of numbers only as it is entered by using DTMF on the remote control when creating/accessing the conference.
Access Password
The Access Password is used to authenticate the particpants in a conference and is defined by the creator of the conference.
This field is only enabled when you have defined a Create Password.
True:
If the Access Password is set to True, the creator is asked to provide a conference password, valid only for the conference at hand. Other participants in this conference must be informed on this password, to be able to access the conference.
False: If Access Password is set to False, the conference will not have any authentication.
Template
Select which Conference
Template to be used for the
Personal Conference.
Edit Participants
Press the the
Edit Participans
button to open the
Add Participants
dialog to add or remove participants.
Save
Press the
Save
button to save changes to your configuration.
129
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
The Direct AdHoc Conferences menu
The
Direct Ad Hoc conference is an alternative to Personal
Conferences and the traditional Ad Hoc conferences.
With
Direct Ad Hoc
conferences you can define a prefix to be used together with several user defined numbers.
The user can easily create a conference by dialling:
< prefix + user defined number>.
Up to 10
Direct Ad Hoc
conferences may be defined. This allows one prefix for each of the 10 templates.
Using the MPS
Prefix
Specify a Prefix to be used for this Direct Ad Hoc conference configuration.
A conference is created by dialling this prefix followed by a user defined number, typically the employee number for the owner of the conference.
Template
Select which Conference Template to be used for this Direct
Ad Hoc conference configuration.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Example:
A company is divided into departments and groups:
!"
Each department and group has been given a Prefix .
!"
Each employee has a user defined number .
Add New
Press the
Add New
button to add a
Prefix and Conference Template for a new group of conferences to the configuration list.
Start a Direct Ad Hoc conference:
1.
A department has the prefix <
4450>
2.
The group manager has the user defined number <
21121>
3.
When the group is having their weekly status meeting the group manager dials <
445021121> to create and start the conference.
4.
To attend the meeting the other group members dials the same number.
Save
Press the
Save
button to save changes to your Direct Ad Hoc Conference configuration.
Delete
Press the
Delete
button to delete your Direct Ad Hoc conference configuration from the list.
130
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
WX/&L/'$#1+&91#;"/%&3/*<
Network Profiles
Network Profiles enables the user to specify a protocol and a service prefix for TANDBERG MPS dialling.
Using the MPS
Name
Enter the name of the new Network Profile in the Name field.
Call Prefix
Enter the Call Prefix of the new Network Profile.
This could be 0 for external call (ref. example 1).
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Network
Auto: IP addresses will select H.323. All other numbers will select ISDN.
H.320: The MCU will always use H.320 (ISDN) when this dial profile is selected.
H.323: The MCU will always use H.323 (IP) when this dial profile is selected.
Save:
Press the Save button to activate the new Network Profiles.
Example 1: Using a Call Prefix
Let us say you have to use the prefix
0
on ISDN in order to call outside your location.
Create a Network Profile:
1.
Enter a Name; we will call it ISDN Out
2.
Set Call Prefix to
0
and
3.
Set Network to H.320
(ISDN).
131
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
:#*0/1/*)/&W/3-"!'/&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Conference Template Configuration
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
Name
The conference name will be shown on the Conference Overview page and on the
Conference Status
page.
Maximum Conference Rate
Custom Selection: Specifiy the maximum possible call rate allowed in the conference. If a participant does not support this rate the MCU will connect at the highest rate possible.
Telephone:
When Telephone is selected, an audio bridge will be created and no video participants will be able to join.
Default IP Net ID
Specifies which IP-network ID to use as default.
Restrict (56K)
Non-restricted and restricted calls are supported in the same conference.
It is thus possible to select restrict for each call individually when dialling.
On: Set Restrict (56K) to On to make the MCU to set up restricted calls by default.
Off: Set Restrict (56K) to Off to make the MCU to set up non-restricted call and down-speed to 56 kbps if necessary.
Allow Incoming Calls
On:
Set to On to allow incoming calls. Incoming call will be automatically answered.
Off:
Set to Off to automatically reject all incoming calls.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Press Save to activate the new settings
Cascading Mode
Used to join two or more conferences together.
Auto: Set to Auto to automatically determine which conference is ‘master’ and which conference(s) are ‘slave’.
The ‘master’ conference will have control over the video layout. When left in ‘Auto’ mode, the conference dialling in to the other conferences, will become the ‘master’.
Master:
Set to Master when this conference is the one controlling the video layout for the whole conference. It is not recommended to have more than one ‘master’ in a conference.
Slave:
Set to Slave when another conference manually has been assigned ‘master’. The slave will be forced to
Full Screen voice switched mode.
132
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS Contents
MCU Conference Template
:#*0/1/*)/&W/3-"!'/&:#*;2<1!'(#*
Conference Template Configuration, 1–n
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
Maximum Call Duration
Determines the maximum duration (minutes) of the conference.
!"
All sites will be disconnected when the specified ‘Max Call Duration’ has been reached.
!"
10 minutes, five minutes and one minute prior to this, a warning will be displayed to all the video participants in the conference, indicating the remaining time.
!"
The conference will remain active, after having timed out, allowing sites to dial in again and restart the conference timer.
!"
The conference administrator can extend the time.
!"
The timer for the max call duration will not begin until the first participant is connected.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Legacy Level
When connecting older videoconferencing endpoints to the MCU, problems can occur since older equipment sometimes do not handle modern capabilities.
!"
When set to 0-7: All capabilities are sent from the MCU
!"
When set to 8-14: The H.264 is disabled.
!"
When set to 15: The only capabilities sent for level 15 are H.261,
G.711 and G.722.
Floor to Full Screen
On: When set to On, the participant requesting the floor will be shown in full screen to all the other video participants, regardless of current speaker. The same will happen if the conference administrator assign floor to a site.
Off: When set to Off, the participant requesting the floor will be shown in the largest sub-picture if there is one in the selected layout.
Press Save to activate the new settings
Billing Code
When defining a conference, a specific billing code can be assigned to the conference.
All calls in this conference will be associated with this billing code. This will allow management tools, such as the
TANDBERG Management Suite, to use the code for billing purposes.
133
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
MCU Conference Template,
cont...
Conference Layouts
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Voice Switched
2 Split
2 Split Top-Bottom
3 Split
4 Split 4 + 3 Split
5 + 1 Split
7 + 1 Split 9 Split 8 + 2 Split
Top-Bottom
8 + 2 Split
Bottom-Top
8 + 2 Split
Top
Conference Layout
Auto: When set to Auto the most suitable conference layout will automatically be selected depending on the total number of participants in the actual conference.
Voice Switched:
Full Screen voice switched will show the current speaker in full screen to all the other participants, regardless of how many participants there are in the conference. Current speaker will see the previous speaker.
Custom Selection:
Select a specific Conference Layout for the conference. The different selections are illustrated to the right.
CP Auto:
When set to CP Auto there will be a dynamic change in layout dependent on the number of sites in the conferense. The
CP Auto will start with VS->CP4->CP9->CP16.
Show Current Speaker
The screen will be split into a specified number of sub-pictures.
The currently speaking participant will be shown in the largest sub-picture in asymmetric layouts. With fewer participants than the total number of sub-pictures, the empty sub-pictures will be black. If there are more participants than the total number of sub-pictures, only the last speakers will be displayed.
8 + 2 Split
Bottom
2 + 1 Split Wide
4 + 1 Split Wide
12 + 1 Split
Center
3 Split Wide
6 Split Wide
12 + 1 Split
Top Left
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
12 + 2 Split
3 + 1 Split Wide
8 + 1 Split Wide
16 Split 30 + 2 Split
4 Split Wide
12 Split Wide
134
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
MCU Conference Template,
cont...
Video settings
Conference Template Configuration
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
CP Autoswitching
The CP Autoswitching enables to swap non speaking sites with the least active sites in the picture. This lets you see all participants in a conference, even if they are not speaking.
CP Autoswitching can be set to a value between
0 seconds
(default) and 60 seconds . The number of seconds denotes how long each of the remaining participants shall be displayed on the screen.
If set to 0 seconds the CP Autoswitching will be disabled.
Note that the CP Autoswitching will be performed in another picture if one or more of the participants speak.
Video Format
Defines the video format for Continuous Presence (CP) mode.
Auto (Best Impression
TF
) In Continuous Presence mode the MPS will select Motion (CIF) if the call rate is below 256 kbps and sending
4:3 aspect ratio. When sending 16:9 aspect ratio the MPS will select
Motion (w288p) if the call rate is below 512 kbps. At call rates of 256 kbps and higher the MPS will select Sharpness (4CIF) when sending 4:3 aspect ratio. When sending 16:9 aspect ratio the MPS will select Sharpness (w576p) at call rates of 512 kbps and higher.
Motion: Set to Motion to prioritize motion and show up to 30 fps in CIF resolution and transmit the highest common format, preferably H.264 CIF when sending 4:3 aspect ratio or H.263+ w288p when sending 16:9 aspect ratio.
Sharpness:
Set to Sharpness to prioritize crisp and clear picture and transmit the highest common format, preferably H.263+ 4CIF when sending 4:3 aspect ratio or
H.263+ w576p when sending 16:9 aspect ratio.
In Full Screen Voice Switched Conference layout, the MCU will prioritize H.264 CIF as the highest common format.
Video Custom Formats
On:
Set to On to support custom formats, such as SIF and
VGA resolutions. It allows true resolution to be maintained, rather than being scaled to another format. This is of particular benefit to users of NTSC and VGA resolutions, ensuring that their images are not scaled to fit with the PAL standard.
Off:
Set to Off when support for custom formats are not needed.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Press Save to activate the new settings
135
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
MCU Conference Template,
cont...
Video settings
Conference Template Configuration
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
Dual Video Stream
The MCU supports DuoVideo
TF
, H.239 and BFCP.
On:
Set to On to enable Dual Video Stream for this conference. Both
DuoVideo
TF
, H.239 are supported in the same conference.
Off:
When set to Off, Dual Video Stream will not be supported in this conference.
Conference Selfview
On:
Set to On to enable Conference Selfview. The user will see himself in the picture when more than one participant is in the conference.
Off:
Set to Off to disable Conference Selfview.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Telephone Indication
On: Set to On to enable a Telephone Indicator to be displayed when there are telephone (audio only) participants connected to the conference. When the telephone participant is speaking the indicator will be outlined.
Off: Set to Off to disable the Telephone Indicator to be displayed.
Speaker Indication
On:
Set to On to enable a Speaker Indicator (a coloured line) to be displayed around the sub-picture that will indicate who is the currently speaking participant.
Off: Set to Off to disable the coloured line to be displayed.
Lecture Mode
On: Set to On to enable the Lecturer to be displayed in full screen to the other participants.
!"
The Lecturer is the participant which is assigned floor.
!"
The Lecturer will see a scan of all the participants in a full screen view or one of the supported sub-picture views.
Off:
Set to Off to disable the Lecturer, the participant which is assigned floor, to be view in full screen.
Press Save to activate the new settings
136
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
MCU Conference Template,
cont...
Video settings
Conference Template Configuration
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Participant Identifier
Auto: Set to Auto to let the System Name of a participant to be displayed the number of seconds set in Participant Identifier Timeout.
On: Set to On to enable the System Name for each participant to be displayed in the picture during the conference.
Off: Set to Off to disable the System Name to be displayed.
Participant Identifier Timeout
Set the number of seconds (1 - 30 seconds) the Participant Identifier will be visible, if set to auto. The identifier will re-appear at every picture changing event.
Chair Control
On: Set to On to enable Chair Control. The conference supports H.243 and BFCP Chair Control functionality initiated from the participants connected to the conference.
Off:
Set to Off to disable Chair Control,
Minimum Bandwidth Treshold
If a participant calls in with a lower bandwidth than the Minimum Bandwidth Threshold, the participant will receive audio only (not live video) as well as a poster saying the bandwidth is to too low. After 10 seconds the participant will receive low rate video.
!"
The Minimum Bandwidth Threshold can be modified during a conference.
!"
The system will move calls below the defined Minimum Bandwidth Threshold to a low rate encoder.
NOTE: Once a participant is moved to the low rate encoder, they will not be moved back even if the Minimum Bandwidth Threshold is lowered.
Optimal Voice Switch
On: Set to On to enable Optimal video format in Voice Switch mode, if the connected endpoints allows this.
Off: When set to Off there will be normal transcoding when doing Voice switch.
!
1.
Optimal Voice Switch is only avaliable on IP.
2.
Icons and text are not avaliable when set to On.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Press Save to activate the new settings
137
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
MCU Conference Template,
cont...
Video settings
- Video settings continued...
Conference Template Configuration
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Encoder Selection Policy
Best Bit Rate:
Set to Best Bit Rate to make the MPS prioritize the video quality for sites based on bit rate. The system will move participants with a Low Video Rate to a secondary encoder, if it is available.
If no sites are moved, the system will move sites with Low Video
Standard.
Best Video Standard: Set to Best Video Standard to make the
MPS prioritize sites based on video standard. The system will move participants with a Low Video Standard to a secondary encoder, if it is available. If no sites are moved, the system will move sites with Low
Video Rate.
Best Resolution:
Set to Best Resolution to make the MPS prioritize the video quality for sites based on resolution. The system will move participants with a Low Resolution to a secondary encoder, if it is available. If no sites are moved, the system will move sites with low video rate.
Secondary Rate
On: Set to On to enable Secondary Rate. The conference will support two outgoing bandwidths if needed, in addition to the low rate video.
Off: Set to Off to disable Secondary Rate.
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Press the Save button to activate the new settings
Web Snapshots
The web snapshots are shown in the upper right corner of the web interface, and will show snapshots of the video from the participants and dual video stream. The snapshots are updated in accordance to the refresh rate (placed above the snapshot).
On: Set to On to enable Web Snapshots. When set to On the Conference Snapshot and Dual Video
Stream Snapshot will show the video transmitted from the MCU to the participants.
Off: When set to Off a picture will appear telling that the Web Snapshots are disabled.
Force Aspect Ratio 4:3
This option modifies the default aspect ratio selection policy in a conference with a mix of 16:9 and 4:3 endpoints. The setting has no impact on switched video streams (see oVS).
On: When set to On, the video aspect ratio for the conference will be forced to 4x3. This differs from the default setting of the MPS, where the aspect ratio will be 16x9 as long as all participating end points can support 16x9. However, the default setting does not take into account situations where the Codec supports 16x9, but the screen is 4x3. A common example of such a scenario is for large rooms with LED’s or other large screens.
Off: When set to Off (default) the aspect ratio will be based on the capabilities of the endpoints.
138
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
MCU Conference Template,
cont...
Audio settings
Conference Template Configuration
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
Voice Switch Timeout
Defines the number of seconds between 1 and 10, a participant must speak before it gets the speaker indication and is shown as the speaker to the other endpoints.
A long timeout might be suitable in noisy environments and in conferences with many participants.
Audio Leveling (AGC)
Ensures that all participants will receive the same audio level from all other participants, regardless of the levels transmitted. AGC - Automatic Gain Control.
In most conferences, the participants will speak at different levels.
As a result, some of the participants are harder to hear than others.
The Audio Leveling corrects this problem by automatically increasing the microphone levels when “quiet” or “distant” people speak, and by decreasing the microphone levels when “louder” people speak.
On:
When set to On the MCU maintains the audio signal level at a fixed value by attenuating strong signals and amplifying weak signals.
Very weak signals, i.e. noise alone, will not be amplified.
Off: Set to Off to disable Audio Leveling (AGC).
Telephone Noise Suppression
On:
Set to On to enable Telephone Noise Suppression. Attenuates the noise which normally is introduced when adding mobile phones to a conference. The background noise normally heard when the telephone participant is not speaking will be attenuated.
Off:
Set to Onffto disable Telephone Noise Suppression.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Allow G.728
On: The MCU supports high quality audio even on low call rate. On low call rate the MCU will prioritize
G.722.1. The video participants which do not support G.722.1 will receive low quality audio G.728 instead when Allow G.728 is set to On.
Off:
To ensure high quality audio on low call rate, set Allow G.728 to Off. Then video participants which are not able to support G.722.1, will receive
G.722 instead.
Press Save to activate the new settings
Far End Telephone Echo Suppression
Analog telephone lines, speaker phones and telephone headsets may all cause echoes. The Far
End Telephone Echo Suppression function eliminates some or all of the experienced echo.
Off:
Set to Off to disable Far End Telephone Echo
Suppression.
Normal:
Set to Normal to remove weak echoes.
High:
Set to High to remove strong echoes.
139
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
MCU Conference Template,
cont...
Security settings
Conference Template Configuration
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
Password
To ensure only authorized participants are able to join this conference you can set a password. Then the participants must enter the password to join this conference. The password can be numerical only.
!"
When dialling into a password protected conference, the participant is met with the ‘Password Enquiry’ screen and sound, asking the participant to enter a password. This can be performed via a menu generated by the videoconferencing system (H.243 Password) or via DTMF (telephone) tones.
!"
Until the correct password is entered, the participant will not be able to hear or see any of the other participants. After entering the correct password and confirming (typically by pressing ‘OK’ or the hash key), the participant will join the conference.
!"
Should the password be incorrect, the participant is met with the
‘Password Incorrect’ screen and after a few seconds, the ‘Password Enquiry’ screen and sound appear again. If the participant enters a wrong password three times, the participant will be disconnected.
!"
With no password entered in this field, participants can join the conference without entering a password
Password Out
On: When set to On and dialling out from a password protected conference, the participant is met with the ‘Password Enquiry’ screen and sound, asking the participant to enter a password. This setting can be used to ensure that only authorized participants are able to join the conference also when dialling out from the conference.
Off: When set to Off no password is required when dialling out.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Press Save to activate the new settings
140
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
MCU Conference Template,
cont...
Security settings
Conference Template Configuration
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
Encryption
On: When set to On all participants in the conference must support
DES or AES encryption (available on all TANDBERG endpoints using software version B4.0 or later).
Participants not supporting encryption will be shown the ‘Encryption
Required’ screen for 60 seconds before they are disconnected from the conference.
Off:
When set to Off the conference will not be encrypted.
!
In a secure conference, there is no support for telephone participants.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Encryption Mode
This settings only applies if
Encryption
is set to On (see above).
Auto: Set to Auto to use the highest level of encryption available on each of the participants connected in the conference. This means that there can be a mix of DES and AES encrypted connections in the same conference.
AES-128: Set to AES-128 to allow only participants with AES 128 bit encryption capabilities. Participants without this capability will not be able to join the conference.
DES:
Set to DES to allow only participants with DES 56 bit encryption capabilities. Participants without this capability will not be able to join the conference.
Protect
On:
When Protect mode is set to On:
1.
Only predefined Protected Numbers are allowed to join this conference.
2.
The Protected Numbers field will be shown, and Protected Numbers can be configured from the Dial In Configuration in the MCU Conference Overview page.
Off: Set to Off to disable the Protect mode.
Press
Save
to activate the new settings
For further information on Protected Numbers, see Protected Numbers
in the
Dial
In Configuration
in the Manage an Ongoing Conference section.
141
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
MCU Conference Template,
cont...
Participants settings
Conference Template Configuration
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
Video Participant Limit
Defines the maximum number of Video Participants allowed in the con-
ference and reserves the number of needed Advanced Video Option
ports for this conference.
Values: 0 - 40 for MPS 200 and 0 - 160 for MPS 800.
Telephone Participant Limit
Defines the maximum number of Telephone Participants allowed in the conference.
Values: 0 - 32 for MPS 200 and 0 - 48 for MPS 800.
Welcome Picture and Sound
On: When set to On a Welcome screen and audio message will be shown to each new participant of the conference.
Off: Set to Off to disable the Welcome screen and audio message.
Entry and Exit Tone
On: When set to On a tone signal will be heard each time a participant is entering or leaving the conference.
Off: Set to Off to disable the Entry and Exit Tone.
Timeout Participants from Call List
On:
When set to On all participants that has been disconnected from the conference will be cleared from the Call List within 2 minutes.
Off:
Set to Off to disable the Timeout Participants from Call List.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Press Save to activate the new settings
142
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
MCU Conference Template,
cont...
Network settings
Conference Template Configuration
The Conference Templates are found in the MCU Configuration tab.
The predefined settings will be used as default settings when creating new conferences based on this specific template. TANDBERG MPS enables the setup of 10 different conference templates.
The conference template contains the same settings as described in the Overview > MCU > Create Conference section.
Bandwidth Management
Manual: Disables automatic regulations of sites to Low rate encoder, based on video rate reports.
Auto: Enables automatic regulations of sites to Low rate encoder, based on video rate reports
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Network
If a conference participant is experiencing poor network quality it will send Fast Update Requests (FUR) to the encoder in the MCU to make it refresh the picture. This can be observed as a short flash in the picture.
Poor network conditions for one participant may have a deteriorating effect on the video quality for some of the participants in the conference.
In an effort to reduce this effect the Network Error Handling can be used.
Network Error Handling
None: Set to None to not enable error handling.
IPLR:
Set to IPLR (Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery) if one or more sites are experiencing network errors.
FURBlock:
Set to FURBlock (Fast Update Request Block) if one or more sites are experiencing network errors.
The Network Error Handling may be set to IPLR (Intelligent Packet Loss
Recovery) or FURBlock (Fast Update Request Block) if one or more sites are experiencing network errors.
IPLR Robust Mode
Auto: When set to Auto, the IPLR Robust Mode is turned on for each encoder when needed.
On: When set to On, the IPLR Robust Mode is on for all encoders.
Please refer to
Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery (IPLR) in the Appendi-
ces section.
FUR Block Sites
Auto: When set to Auto, the FUR’s from sites that send too many will be blocked.
On: When set to On, the FUR’s from all sites will be blocked.
Press Save to activate the new settings
FUR Filter Interval
Denotes the number of seconds between
FUR’s, e.g. the minimum time between
FUR’s that will refresh the picture.
143
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*
File Management
File Management
The File Management allows viewing and changing pictures, sounds and symbols, which are shown to the participants when connecting to, and during a conference on the MCU.
See also the Language submenu in System Configuration.
To add a new file, press Browse to find the file, and then press
Upload
. For each of the customized files, a
Delete
button will be added in the Type column.
Using the MPS
Web Interface
The following web interface options can be specified:
!"
Language - Upload language files
!"
Value Space - Upload Value Space files.
Dialog Pictures
Examples of MCU dialog pictures that can be specified:
!"
Welcome Screen
!"
Bandwidth
!"
Conference ID Create
!"
Conference ID Create No Match
!"
Downspeed
!"
Encryption
!"
Password Activate
!"
Password Create
!"
Password Enter
!"
Password Reject
!"
Ambigous Conference ID
!"
Now, Enter Conference ID
!"
Not Started Activate
!"
Not Started Wait
!"
Only Participant
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
File
Press the name of the
File on the left side of the window to view or hear the content of the file.
Type
!"
When a customized file has been uploaded the text “Predefined file“ is replaced with a Delete button.
!"
When a customized file has been deleted the Delete button is replaced with the text “Predefined file“.
Browse
Press the Browse button to find a file.
Upload
Press the Upload button to upload the file.
144
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
I:Y&:#*;2<1!'(#*R
cont...
File Management
File Management
The File Management allows viewing and changing pictures, sounds and symbols, which are shown to the participants when connecting to, and during a conference on the MCU.
To add a new file, press
Browse
to find the file, and then press Upload . For each of the customized files, a Delete button will be added in the Type column.
Using the MPS
Dialog Sounds
Examples of MCU dialog sounds that can be specified:
!"
Welcome Sound
!"
Password Enquiry Sound
!"
Conference ID Create Sound
!"
Conference ID Create No Match Sound
!"
Downspeed Sound
!"
Encryption Sound
!"
Password Activate Sound
!"
Password Create Sound
!"
Password Wrong Sound
!"
Ambiguous Conference ID Sound
!"
Now, Enter Conference ID Sound
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices Contact us
Symbols
A Custom Logo can be specified:
!"
Recommended size is 64 x 64 pixels
!"
The MPS must be restarted to display the Custom Logo
!"
The Custom Logo will be presented in the upper left corners on all conferences hosted by the MPS. This logo can be used to identify/verify the MPS hosting the conference.
The logo will not be present in conferences which have enabled and are using optimal Voice Switch, oVS.
Legal File Formats
At the bottom of the page, custom file requirements are listed for each of the file-types.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
145
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Chapter 8
Appendices
Administrator Guide
Contact us
The Appendices gives a detailed technical description of the System Controller Board,
Media Boards and the different types of
Network Interface Boards. You will also find more information on miscellaneous features on the MPS, how to insert additional network cards, system management and conference security etc.
You will also find the technical specification on the MPS 800 and MPS 200 along with other information you may need to better understand how to utilize the TANDBERG MPS.
Stay up-to-date
We recommend you visit the TANDBERG web site regularly for an updated version of this guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs
In this chapter...
The System Controller Board Interface
The Media Processing Board Interface
E1/T1 Network Interface Card (IIC-8)
V.35 Serial Interface Card (SIC-32)
MPS 800–Inserting network interface cards
MPS 200–Inserting network interface cards
About the Quality of Service (QoS) feature
Secure Conference (Encryption)
System Management and Security
Product Approvals and CE Declarations
SIP - Current RFC’s and Drafts Supported
Configuring LCS and MPS for SIP
Configuring OCS 2007 and MPS for SIP
146
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
The System Controller Board Interface
TANDBERG MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 has a 9U-19” rack-mountable chassis that can host up to
8 Media Processing Boards and 4 Network
Interface Cards.
TANDBERG MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 has 3U-19” rackmountable chassis that can host up to 2
Media Processing Boards and 2 Network
Interface Cards.
Front Chassis
The TANDBERG MPS chassis is 19” rackmountable. On the front of the chassis is a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) for initial configuration and basic system information.
You will also find 4 Light Emitting Diodes
(LEDs) for power status. The backplane of the chassis is provided with advanced
CompactPCI technology for high speed communication between the boards. You will find 3 cooling fans in the lower front of the chassis.
Rear Chassis MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 is shipped with
2 hot-swappable power units for configurations of 1 to 3 Media Processing Boards.
If the unit has more than 3 Media Processing Boards the TANDBERG MPS 800 is equipped with 3 hot-swappable power units. The power units are installed at the back of the chassis. You will also find the power switch/connector at the back of the chassis.
Rear Chassis MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 is shipped with 1 power unit integrated in the chassis.
System Controller Board
The System Controller Board takes care of the following functions:
!"
Call control
!"
System management
!"
The embedded Web server
The LAN and Enet2 interfaces will allow you to connect to two different nonoverlapping IP-networks so that participants with no IP-routing between them can be joined in the same conference. At least one Media Processing Board must be connected to each network.
The 2 x LAN interfaces will also give the TANDBERG MPS support for two Gatekeepers, one on each network.
Rear View
LAN Interface
The LAN interface on the System
Controller Board is for management/call control signalling.
!"
1 x LAN / Ethernet (RJ-45)
10/100 Mbps
USB Interface
USB0 and USB1 are for future use.
Serial Port Interface
To use the asynchronous serial port
(J23) COM1 port, you need a RJ-45 to RS-232 converter. This port is configured as DCE.
ABT and RST Buttons
RST - Press and hold RST button for a few seconds to restart the system. Restart can also be done via the LCD on the chassis.
CPU and FAIL LEDs
CPU LED - On when CPU activity
FAIL LED - On when parameter inconsistency in boot code
10/100 BASE T
(Ethernet 10/100)
USB1
(not in use)
USB0
(not in use)
Not in use
COM1
(serial port)
ABT (not in use)
RST (Reset button)
CPU LED
FAIL LED
Rear View
Only the LAN interface
Enet2 is in use. No other sockets on the rear System Controller
Board are in use.
LAN Interface
The second LAN interface (Enet2) of the System Controller Board is accessible from the rear side.
The Enet2 interface is only in use if you are connecting the MPS to two separate IP networks.
Note that system management is disabled on Enet2. The Enet2 interface is only for call control.
!"
2 x LAN / Ethernet (RJ-45)
10/100 Mbps (Enet1 not in use)
Serial Port Pinout
5
6
3
4
7
8
Pin
COM1 Pinout
Description
1 DCD
2 RTS
GND
TXD
RXD
GND
CTS
DTR
Administrator Guide
Contact us
KB/MS
(Keyboard/Mouse)
(not in use)
Not in use
COM1
Enet1
(not in use)
Enet2
(Ethernet 10/100)
Serial 3/4
(not in use)
147
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
The Media Processing Board Interface
TANDBERG MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 has a 9U-19” rack-mountable chassis that can host up to
8 Media Processing Boards and 4 Network
Interface Cards.
TANDBERG MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 has 3U-19” rackmountable chassis that can host up to 2
Media Processing Boards and 2 Network
Interface Cards.
Front Chassis
The TANDBERG MPS chassis is 19” rackmountable. On the front of the chassis is a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) for initial configuration and basic system information.
You will also find 4 Light Emitting Diodes
(LEDs) for power status. The backplane of the chassis is provided with advanced
CompactPCI technology for high speed communication between the boards. You will find 3 cooling fans in the lower front of the chassis.
Rear Chassis MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 is shipped with
2 hot-swappable power units for configurations of 1 to 3 Media Processing Boards.
If the unit has more than 3 Media Processing Boards the TANDBERG MPS 800 is equipped with 3 hot-swappable power units. The power units are installed at the back of the chassis. You will also find the power switch/connector at the back of the chassis.
Rear Chassis MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 is shipped with 1 power unit integrated in the chassis.
Media Processing Board
Add-on boards for media processing are installed in adjacent slots in the chassis.
The Media Processing Boards are handling the following functions:
!"
Video processing, see Video Features in the Appendices section for details.
!"
Audio processing, see Audio > Create Conference in the Using the MPS section for details.
!"
Transcoding, see Transcoding and Ratematching in the Appendices section for details.
!"
Encryption, see Secure Conference (Encryption) in the Appendices section for details.
!"
Continuous Presence/Voice Switching, see Video Features in the Appendices section for details.
TANDBERG MPS 800 has support for up to 8 Media Processing Boards.
TANDBERG MPS 200 has support for up to 2 Media Processing Boards.
Each Media Processing Board gives:
!"
5 fully featured conferences
!"
20 video sites @ 384kbps
!"
16 audio sites @ 64kbps
One media board is, in conjunction with a network interface card, capable of a total of 7680 kbps for H.320/ISDN calls. For IP video calls without encryption it can handle 15360 kbps.
Two different IP Networks
If your TANDBERG MPS is connected to two different IP Networks utilizing both of the Ethernet ports (LAN and Enet2) on the System Controller Board, you need to pre-define the Media Processing Boards to Network #1 or
Network #2. This is done in the Media Board Configuration
in the System
Configuration section, by choosing either Network ID 1 or 2 for the respective Media Processing Boards.
Front View
The Media Processing Board is equipped with LAN interface for H.323 media:
!"
1xLAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbps
4 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) for board status.
1. Alarm
: Red Alarm indicates that the
Ethernet link is lost
2. Alarm
: Flashes during startup and/ or media processing board application failure.
3. Active
: Green in normal operation
4. Power
: Green in normal operation
Advanced Video Option
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Alarm
Alarm
Active
Power
4 LEDs
10/100 BASE T
(Ethernet 10/100)
Advanced Video Option
A Media Processing Board can be purchased with or without the Advanced
Video Option (AVO). See Video Features in the Appendices section for further information.
All video participants will use one Advanced Video Option. In addition one
Advanced Video Option will be used if Dual Stream is enabled in the conference.
The Advanced Video Option gives support for the following:
!"
Continuous Presence
!"
Dual Stream - support for both DuoVideo
TF
, H.239 and BFCP
!"
Custom Video Formats (Digital Clarity
TF
)
!"
Best Impression
TF
All Media Boards should be connected to the IP network and be given an IP
address to work properly, see Media Board IP Configuration for details.
148
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
E1/T1 Network Interface Card (IIC-8)
TANDBERG MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 has a 9U-19” rack-mountable chassis that can host up to
8 Media Processing Boards and 4 Network
Interface Cards.
TANDBERG MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 has 3U-19” rackmountable chassis that can host up to 2
Media Processing Boards and 2 Network
Interface Cards.
Front Chassis
The TANDBERG MPS chassis is 19” rackmountable. On the front of the chassis is a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) for initial configuration and basic system information.
You will also find 4 Light Emitting Diodes
(LEDs) for power status. The backplane of the chassis is provided with advanced
CompactPCI technology for high speed communication between the boards. You will find 3 cooling fans in the lower front of the chassis.
Rear Chassis MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 is shipped with
2 hot-swappable power units for configurations of 1 to 3 Media Processing Boards.
If the unit has more than 3 Media Processing Boards the TANDBERG MPS 800 is equipped with 3 hot-swappable power units. The power units are installed at the back of the chassis. You will also find the power switch/connector at the back of the chassis.
Rear Chassis MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 is shipped with 1 power unit integrated in the chassis.
E1/T1 Network Interface Card
!"
The MPS 800 supports up to 4 E1/T1 Network Interface Cards.
!"
The MPS 200 supports up to 2 E1/T1 Network Interface Cards.
!"
Each E1/T1 Interface Card gives 8 E1/T1 PRI ports.
!"
PRI ports/options are purchased in groups of 4 PRI ports.
!"
The E1/T1 Interface Card is also used for G.703 Leased Line calls.
ISDN Protocol
!"
All 8 PRI ports on the same PRI card must use the same ISDN protocol and the same network interface (E1 or T1).
!"
However, there is support for separate PRI protocols on each E1/T1
Interface Card.
Connecting the Card
!"
The E1/T1 Interface Card is installed in the rear of the chassis. See the
TANDBERG MPS 800 – E1/T1 interface cards
on how the card is installed.
!"
One Media Processing Board must be in front of each E1/T1 Interface
Card.
!"
The Network Interface Card connects into the back of a Media Processing Board
by connecting to its J5-connector from the back of the chassis.
Network Clock
The card connected to Media Processing Board #1 provides the primary network clock for the unit.
When you have an E1/T1 Interface Card connected to this Media Processing
Board, the command line interface command reconfigures which PRI-port this clock is taken from: xConfiguration SystemClock Port <0,1-8>
!"
The value
0
is auto, meaning the first port with a clock.
!"
The value
1
-
8
tells the TANDBERG MPS to take the clock from that specific PRI-port.
Rear View
The E1/T1 Card is equipped with
PRI ports for ISDN interface:
!"
8 x E1/T1 PRI ports (RJ-45)
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) for PRI
Port status, with 4 LEDs for each
E1/T1 PRI port:
!"
Red
– Layer 1 Red Alarm
!"
Yellow – Layer 1 Yellow Alarm
!"
Green – Layer 1 OK
!"
Red
– D-Channel Down
See next page for more information about the LEDs.
Serial RS-232
PRI E1/T1 Cable
The cable of use should be a straight through configuration.
TANDBERG recommends always using at least category
5 cabling.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
8 x E1/T1
PRI Ports
4 LED’s for each PRI
Interface
Serial
RS-232
4
5
PRI E1/T1 Pinout
PRI Pinout
1 TIP RX
2 RING RX
RING TX
TIP TX
149
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
E1/T1 Network Interface Card (IIC-8),
cont...
LED’s for the E1/T1 PRI Interface Card (IIC-8)
You will find 4 Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) for each PRI interface which provides information about PRI-line status.
Channel Service Unit (CSU)
The PRI interface may require an external CSU (Channel
Service Unit) depending on the network layout.
The Cable Length in the PRI configuration menu specifies the distance from the MCU to the CSU or last repeater.
Read the LEDs for each of the PRI interfaces on the E1/T1 Interface Card from left to right:
1. Red LED
- If On this indicates
Layer 1 Red Alarm
2. Yellow LED
- If On this indicates Layer 1 Yellow Alarm
3. Green LED
- If On this indicates Layer 1 OK
4. Red LED
- If On this indicates that
D-channel is Down
Red Alarm
or
Loss of Signal
(LOS) indicates that there is no signal and thus no framing info received. The same effect will be obtained by pulling out the PRI cable. This may also be caused by a broken connector in the receive (RX) part of the cable.
Supported the PRI protocols
!"
AT&T Custom
!"
National ISDN
!"
Japan/Taiwan ISDN
!"
ETSI (Euro ISDN)
Yellow Alarm or Remote Alarm Indicator (RAI) means that the MCU is receiving framing info, but in this framing info the other side tells the MCU that it is not reading the MCU’s transmitted framing info. Typically, this may be a broken connector in the transmit (TX) part of the PRI cable. This could also indicate weak or noisy signal in the transmit (TX) part of the PRI cable.
!"
The AT&T, Japan ISDN and National protocols gives a total of 23 B-channels per port
!"
The ETSI protocol gives a total of 30 B-channels per port.
Green LED or Layer 1 OK doubles as a clock source indicator. The LED for one of the eight interfaces will flash to indicate that the interface is being used as the clock source for H.110 bus.
!"
On
- Layer 1 OK, not clock source
!"
On + Flash
(long On/short Off) Layer 1 OK, used as clock source
!"
Off - Layer 1 Down, not clock source
!"
Off + Flash
(long Off/short On) Layer 1 down, used as clock source
Within these protocols the following switches are supported:
@%,&.+(-""8'$&$.$D-"-/GG$'&(*
4ESS (AT&T)
5ESS (AT&T)
AT&T Custom
AT&T Custom and National ISDN
DMS250 (Nortel) National ISDN
DMS100 (Nortel) National ISDN
(Any switch) ETSI (Euro ISDN)
Red Alarm or D-Channel Down indicates that the ISDN out-of-band signalling channel is down. The D channel carries user-network signalling information and is primarily used in call setup and teardown. Note that for NFAS the D channel may not be used for all PRI interfaces. A red LED may thus not indicate anything wrong.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Channel Hunting
Channel hunting is provided for outgoing calls. The feature is normally used when the number of channels needs to be specified.
!"
When no value is specified for low or high channel, they are default to 1 (low), 23 (high US) and 30 (high Europe).
!"
Default search is from high to low.
150
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
E1/T1 Network Interface Card (IIC-8),
cont...
PRI T1 (US only)
Network Service Facility (NSF) can be configured to mode Off (i.e. NSF not used – default) or mode On with any value between 0 and 31, to describe the service facility on the PRI/T1 line.
NSF Service codes
AT&T offers several digital switched services. These include SDN with service code 1 and
ACCUNET with service code 6.
Below is a list of common service profiles. As these profiles may change, contact your service provider to get the correct profile.
ISDN Aggregation Standards
1. H.221
Frame Structure from 64 (56*) kbps to 128 kbps
2. ISO 13871
BONDING, Mode 1 from 64 (56*) kbps to 2 Mbps
H.221
!"
For bit rates from 56 kbps up to 128 kbps (1 or 2 channels).
!"
The maximum relative delay difference between the 2 B-channels is 0.6 second.
BONDING
!"
ISO 13871, BONDING Mode 1 for bit rates from 56 kbps up to 2 Mbps
(1 to 30 channels).
!"
The maximum relative delay difference between B-channels is 0.5 second (i.e. to compensate for different routing of channels).
Code
0
1
8
16
23
6
7
2
3
AT&T Service Code (Ref.1)
Service
Disable *
SDN (including GSDN)
Toll Free Megacom (800)
Megacom
ACCUNET Switched Digital Service (incl. Switched Digital International)
Long Distance Service (incl. AT&T World Connect)
International Toll Free Service (1800)
AT&T MultiQuest
Call Redirection Service
Standard bandwidths on H.320
30ch – 24 – 23 – 18 – 12 – 8 – 6 – 5 – 4 – 3 – 2 – 1
ISDN Channel Setup
The following is a description of how the ISDN channels are set up.
!"
Incoming & Outgoing MCU calls : Normally the MCU will set up only 1 channel from PRI 1 and build up the channels starting from the bottom of the last PRI in use.
!"
This will ensure that the MCU always have available channels on the first
PRI number (which normally should be the MCUs main number).
!"
The TANDBERG MPS supports simultaneous dial in to the same conference on ISDN.
4
5
2
3
Code
Sprint Service Code (Ref.2)
Service
0 Reserved
1 Private
Inwatts
Outwatts
FX
TieTrunk
3
4
5
Code
MCI Service Code (Ref.2)
Service
1 VNET / Vision
2 800
PRISM1, PRISMII, WATS
900
DAL
* “0” will still send NSF in the Q931 setup, which may cause calls to fail. Set to mode “off” if not needed.
Ref. 1: AT&T TR 41459 Specification, June 1999, page 76
Ref. 2: Ascend Multiband Plus-T1/PRI, User Documentation, Page 6-8
Administrator Guide
Contact us
151
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
V.35 Serial Interface Card (SIC-32)
TANDBERG MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 has a 9U-19” rack-mountable chassis that can host up to
8 Media Processing Boards and 4 Network
Interface Cards.
TANDBERG MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 has 3U-19” rackmountable chassis that can host up to 2
Media Processing Boards and 2 Network
Interface Cards.
Front Chassis
The TANDBERG MPS chassis is 19” rackmountable. On the front of the chassis is a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) for initial configuration and basic system information.
You will also find 4 Light Emitting Diodes
(LEDs) for power status. The backplane of the chassis is provided with advanced
CompactPCI technology for high speed communication between the boards. You will find 3 cooling fans in the lower front of the chassis.
Rear Chassis MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 is shipped with
2 hot-swappable power units for configurations of 1 to 3 Media Processing Boards.
If the unit has more than 3 Media Processing Boards the TANDBERG MPS 800 is equipped with 3 hot-swappable power units. The power units are installed at the back of the chassis. You will also find the power switch/connector at the back of the chassis.
Rear Chassis MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 is shipped with 1 power unit integrated in the chassis.
V.35 Serial Interface Card (SIC-32)
!"
32 x V.35 ports with optional RS366 Dialling
!"
Each port support rates from 64kbps up to 1920kbps
!"
Each port can either be dual-clocked (RS449, RS530, and
V.35), or single clocked for X.21 applications.
!"
V.35 ports/options are purchased in groups of 8 V.35 ports.
Connecting the Card
A Media Processing Board must be in front of each V.35 Serial
Interface Card. See the TANDBERG MPS 800 V.35 interface cards on how the V.35 Interface Cards are installed in the rear of the chassis.
V.35 is shipped as a kit. The V.35 kit includes the following:
!"
The V.35 Serial Interface Card
!"
4 cables that convert from high-density connectors on V.35 card to TANDBERGs standard V.35 connectors (26pin DSUB)
!"
19” rack-mountable panel where the V.35 connectors will fit.
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
You will also find Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) on the board. The
LEDs gives you visual feedback on the status of the board.
Cable Specifications
To get more information on the cables needed to connect to the
26pin DSUB, refer to the following Cable Specification Documents:
!"
V.35 Cable specification, D1231201
!"
V.35 and RS366 Cable specification, D1230501
!"
X.21 Cable specification, D1230101
The above specification documents can be found on http://www.tandberg.com/support/documentation.
php?p=Components_and_Cables
Red Alarm Port 17-20
Red Alarm Port 25-28
Red Alarm Port 1-4
Red Alarm Port 9-12
Green Blink - Board OK
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Rear View
The V.35 Card is equipped with V.35 ports for serial interface:
!"
32 x V.35 ports with optional RS366 Dialling
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) for V.35 Port status:
!"
Green Blink
– The LED flashes every 2nd second to indicate the driver on the board is OK.
!"
Red Alarm
- The LED(s) turns red when an alarm appear on any of the ports. Each LED indicates status of four ports.
!"
Green Power/Restart
- The LEDs indicates the power status. While in restart mode one LED will blink.
!"
Yellow LEDs - Always On
For more information about status on the V.35 card, see
System Status > Serial V.35 Board Status
Green - Power/Restart
Red Alarm Port 21-24
Red Alarm Port 29-32
Green - Power/Restart
Red Alarm Port 5-8
Red Alarm Port 13-16
SIC32
152
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS
V.35 Serial Interface Card (SIC-32),
cont...
Cable Description
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
PLUG C
POS 35
POS 68
1600mm
+50.00
0.00
POS 1
POS 34
B
PLUG A
PLUG B
POS 19
POS 10
POS 1
POS 26
POS 18
Frontview
POS 9
V.35 Pinout Table Plug A
28
29
30
31
23
24
25
26
27
32
33
34
18
19
20
21
22
14
15
16
17
6
NC
NC
1
3
4
NC
2
5
8
9
NC
7
10
15
23
22
26
NC
NC
NC
14
15
15
16
12
12
13
13
14
16
17
17
9
10
10
11
11
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
4
3
3
5
1
2
2
Pair no Plug C Plug A Signal Name
1 1 25 LOST SIG
7
8
5
6
9
2
3
4
NC
18
17
12
11
14
13
19
GND
CLK TX +
CLK TX -
TX +
TX -
RX +
RX -
GND
10
11
12
13
24
21
20
16
INCALL
TR +
TR -
CLK RX +
GND
DPR
ACR
CRQ
PND
DLO
VCC
VCC
GND
CLK RX -
RR +
RR -
DTR
GND
RS_366 1
RS_366 2
RS_366 4
RS_366 8
GND
GEN IN
I_CALL OUT
Administrator Guide
Contact us
V.35 Pinout Table Plug B
62
63
64
65
57
58
59
60
61
66
67
68
52
53
54
55
56
48
49
50
51
6
NC
NC
1
3
4
NC
2
5
NC
NC
NC
8
9
NC
7
10
15
23
22
26
14
15
15
16
12
12
13
13
14
16
17
17
9
10
10
11
11
8
9
7
8
6
7
5
6
4
4
3
3
5
1
2
2
Pair no Plug C Plug B Signal Name
1 35 25 LOST SIG
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
NC
18
17
12
11
14
13
19
GND
CLK TX +
CLK TX -
TX +
TX -
RX +
RX -
GND
44
45
46
47
24
21
20
16
INCALL
TR +
TR -
CLK RX +
GND
DPR
ACR
CRQ
PND
DLO
VCC
VCC
GND
CLK RX -
RR +
RR -
DTR
GND
RS_366 1
RS_366 2
RS_366 4
RS_366 8
GND
GEN IN
I_CALL OUT
153
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Power Supplies
TANDBERG MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 has a 9U-19” rack-mountable chassis that can host up to
8 Media Processing Boards and 4 Network
Interface Cards.
TANDBERG MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 has 3U-19” rackmountable chassis that can host up to 2
Media Processing Boards and 2 Network
Interface Cards.
Front Chassis
The TANDBERG MPS chassis is 19” rackmountable. On the front of the chassis is a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) for initial configuration and basic system information.
You will also find 4 Light Emitting Diodes
(LEDs) for power status. The backplane of the chassis is provided with advanced
CompactPCI technology for high speed communication between the boards. You will find 3 cooling fans in the lower front of the chassis.
Rear Chassis MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 is shipped with
2 hot-swappable power units for configurations of 1 to 3 Media Processing Boards.
If the unit has more than 3 Media Processing Boards the TANDBERG MPS 800 is equipped with 3 hot-swappable power units. The power units are installed at the back of the chassis. You will also find the power switch/connector at the back of the chassis.
Rear Chassis MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 is shipped with 1 power unit integrated in the chassis.
Using the MPS System status
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
On the rear side you will find 2 Light Emitting
Diodes (LEDs) for power status on each of the power supplies:
!"
Power : Green when in in normal operation
!"
Alarm : Red indicates power failure
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Power Supply for TANDBERG MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 is shipped with 2 hot-swappable power units.
They are installed at the back of the chassis.
If the MPS has more than 3 Media Processing Boards the TANDBERG
MPS is shipped with 3 hot-swappable power units.
The power switch/connector is found at the back of the chassis.
Power
Alarm
Administrator Guide
Contact us
154
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
MPS 800–Inserting additional network interface cards
TANDBERG MPS 800
The TANDBERG MPS 800 has a 9U-19” rackmountable chassis.
!"
There is support for up to 4 Network Interface
Cards in the software version J3 and above.
!"
There can be a mix of Network Interface Cards
!"
Network Interface Cards are installed in the rear side of the chassis.
!"
One Media Processing Board must be in front of each Network Interface Card.
PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Card
You can install up to 4 PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface
Cards.
!"
The PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Cards are installed in the rear of the chassis.
!"
One Media Processing Board must be in front of each ISDN Interface Card.
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Contact us
PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Card
4 x PRI E1/T1 ISDN Network Interface Cards on rear side
4 x Media Processing Cards in front
V.35 Serial Interface Card
4 x V.35 Serial Interface Cards on rear side
4 x Media Processing Cards in front
Mix of Network Interface Cards
2 x PRI E1/T1 ISDN Network Interface Cards on rear side
2 x V.35 Serial Interface Cards on rear side
4 x Media Processing Cards in front
V.35 Serial Interface Card
You can install up to 4 V.35 Serial Interface
Cards.
!"
The V.35 Interface Cards are installed in the rear of the chassis.
!"
One Media Processing Board must be in front of each V.35 Interface Card.
Mix of Network Interface Cards
You can install a mix of PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface
Cards and V.35 Serial Interface Cards.
!"
The PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Cards and the
V.35 Interface Cards are installed in the rear of the chassis.
!"
One Media Processing Board must be in front of each ISDN/V.35 Interface Card.
155
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
MPS 200–Inserting additional network interface cards
TANDBERG MPS 200
The TANDBERG MPS 200 has 3U-19” rack-mountable chassis.
!"
There is support for up to 2 Network Interface
Cards in the software version J3 and above.
!"
There can be a mix of Network Interface Cards
!"
Network Interface Cards are installed in the rear side of the chassis.
!"
One Media Processing Board must be in front of each Network Interface Card.
PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Card
2 x PRI E1/T1 ISDN Network Interface
Cards on rear side
2 x Media Processing Cards in front
SERIAL 3/4
ENET 2 ENET 1 COM 1
KB/MS
PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Card
You can install up to 2 PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface
Cards.
!"
The PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Cards are installed in the rear of the chassis.
!"
One Media Processing Board must be in front of each ISDN Interface Card.
V.35 Serial Interface Card
2 x V.35 Serial Interface Cards on rear side
2 x Media Processing Cards in front
V.35 Serial Interface Card
You can install up to 2 V.35 Serial Interface
Cards.
!"
The V.35 Interface Cards are installed in the rear of the chassis.
!"
One Media Processing Board must be in front of each V.35 Interface Card.
SERIAL 3/4
ENET 2 ENET 1 COM 1
KB/MS
Mix of Network Interface Cards
You can install a mix of PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface
Cards and V.35 Serial Interface Cards.
!"
The PRI E1/T1 ISDN Interface Card and the
V.35 Interface Card are installed in the rear of the chassis.
!"
One Media Processing Board must be in front of each ISDN/V.35 Interface Card.
Mix of Network Interface Cards
1 x PRI E1/T1 ISDN Network Interface
Cards on rear side
1 x V.35 Serial Interface Cards on rear side
2 x Media Processing Cards in front
SERIAL 3/4
ENET 2 ENET 1
COM 1 KB/MS
Administrator Guide
Contact us
156
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
About the Quality of Service (QoS) feature
Quality of Service (QoS)
All QoS features must be enabled in your IP network in addition to correct MPS configuration.
QoS Configuration for the MPS is done from
System Configuration in the web interface, see
IP Precedence
IP Precedence is a classification of packets from 0 (low priority) to 7 (high priority). The values 6 and 7 are typically reserved for congestion control.
IP Precedence helps a router select what kind of traffic to prioritize. By means of queue mechanisms, it can select which packets to send first and which to throw away. Some information/traffic is time critical while other is not, and classification is used to differentiate this traffic.
One may set separate IP Precedence for Signalling, Audio, Video and Data
(values 1 – 7) as well as turn IP Precedence off.
DiffServ
DiffServ defines which priority audio, video, data and signalling packets should have in an IP network.
IP Precedence
IP Precedence defines which priority audio, video, data and signalling should have in an IP network.
The higher the number, the higher the priority.
The
Auto
setting uses the following values for IP Precedence:
!"
Signalling = 4
!"
Audio/Video = 4
!"
Data = 4 (e.g. FECC commands)
Separate priorities for Audio and Video are not recommended as this may cause reduced quality and lipsync problems.
Type of Service
Type of Service enables the user to define what type of connection that should be chosen for the
IP traffic. Helps a router select a routing path when multiple paths are available.
Differential Services (DiffServ)
Differential services is another method of QoS offered by TANDBERG that utilizes 6 bits of the Type of Services Byte. Differential services is an extension of IP Precedence, where one can set values from 0 to 63
(63=Highest priority). This method is currently replacing IP Precedence as the preferred method for setting priority of packet traffic.
IP Type of Service (TOS)
TOS helps a router select a routing path when multiple paths are available.
!"
Delay - tells router to minimize delay
!"
Throughput - tells router to maximize throughput
!"
Reliability - tells router to maximize reliability
!"
Cost - tells router to minimized cost
!"
Off - Turns TOS off
Administrator Guide
Contact us
157
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
About video features
TANDBERG Best Impression
TF
TANDBERG’s Best Impression
TF
feature consists of 3 parts:
!"
Automatic Continuous Presence
(CP) layout switching
!"
Automatic Continuous Presence
(CP) resolution switching
!"
Enhanced video transcoding
Automatic Continuous Presence (CP) Layout Switching
When Conference Layout is set to Auto the following table describes the picture sent from the TANDBERG MPS.
Layout Switching
No of video sites in conference Picture Mode used
1 or 2 Full Screen
3 -> 6 5 + 1 split
> 6 7 + 1 split
The TANDBERG MPS allows for changing between any of these modes during the conference.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Automatic Continuous Presence (CP) Resolution Switching
DuoVideo
TF
/H.239/BFCP
DuoVideo
TF
/H.239/BFCP may be sent in both Continous Precence and Voice Switched mode.
!"
The TANDBERG MPS will transmit the same format as the one received if all the sites are capable of receiving it.
!"
The Video Format will fallback is as described for Voice Switched mode.
Automatic Continuous Presence (CP) Resolution Switching
Voice Switched Mode
In Voice Switched mode or when someone has the floor the TAND-
BERG MPS will send the same format as the one received if all sites are capable of receiving it.
If one of the sites cannot receive the preferred video format (or if a site asks for a video format not supported by the MCU), the MCU will fallback according to the following table:
Voice Switched Mode
Preferred Video Format Fallback Video Format
XGA SVGA
SVGA VGA
VGA
4SIF
4CIF
H.264 SIF
H.264 CIF
H.263 SIF
H.263 CIF
H.261 CIF
H.263 QCIF
4CIF
4CIF
H.263 CIF
H.264 CIF
H.263 CIF
H.263 CIF
H.261 CIF
H.263 QCIF
H.261 QCIF
Automatic Continuous Presence (CP) Resolution Switching
Continuous Presence Mode (CP)
In Continuous Presence mode the TANDBERG MPS administrator may set the conference up for Motion, Sharpness or Auto:
Video Format
Modes
Continuous Presence Mode
CP Mode Meeting Rate MCU will transmit the highest possible common video format according to:
MOTION Any Any H.263 w288p -> H.264 CIF -> H.263 CIF ->
H.261 CIF -> H.263 QCIF -> H.261 QCIF
SHARPNESS Any Any
AUTO (4:3)
AUTO (16:9)
AUTO (4:3)
Any
Any
Any
< 256 kbps
< 512 kbps
=> 256 kbps
H.263 w576p -> H.263 4CIF -> H.264 CIF
-> H.263 CIF -> H.261 CIF -> H.263 QCIF
-> H.261 QCIF
Same formats as for MOTION, excluding w288p w288p
Same formats as for SHARPNESS, excluding w576p
AUTO (16:9) Any => 512 kbps w576p
158
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
About video features,
cont...
4CIF Digital Clarity
TF
This feature allows for H.263 4CIF (704x576) live video images to be sent to the far end, allowing 4 times higher resolution than traditional videoconferencing systems for displaying document camera video and other high-resolution images.
H.263+ Custom Video Formats (Digital
Clarity
TF)
TANDBERG MPS supports encoding of a true
XGA, SVGA, VGA and NTSC (SIF) resolutions.
!"
This allows the TANDBERG MPS to send all video signals in their true native resolution.
!"
If the source is sending XGA, SVGA or VGA, the receiving system will decode and display the same quality image as was sent by the transmitting side.
!"
Also supported under the H.263+ custom formats is TANDBERG’s use of SIF (Source
Input Format) that allows for an improved
NTSC image over traditional CIF based MCU.
H.263+ Widescreen formats
TANDBERG MPS support encoding of true widescreen (16:9) formats: w288p (512x288) and w576p (1024x576).
!"
Widescreen formats will only be used if all participants in the conference support it.
!"
When encoding widescreen formats, the
TANDBERG MPS will use special layouts designed to utilize widescreen monitors.
See
in the Create Conference view for a list of all available layouts.
Dual Video Stream
- DuoVideo
TF
/ H.239 / BFCP
Dual Video Stream (DuoVideo
TF
/H.239/BFCP) is a feature that allows two simultaneous video streams to be transmitted from one system and be received by the other participants. This feature is supported on both H.320, H.323 and SIP.
This allows a presenter and their presentation to be seen at the same time, in much the same way you would expect them to be in a local room environment.
If systems in a conference are TANDBERG dual monitor systems, they will receive the presenter on one screen and the presentation (PC, Doc-
Cam, VCR, DVD etc) on the other.
If the TANDBERG system is a single monitor system with default settings, the video stream will automatically switch from the presenter to the presentation. This change will take place on the fly, with the displayed stream returning to the presenter when the Dual Video Stream is disconnected.
Video towards all the other video sites capable of receiving it.
2.
Now, if another site requests for Dual Video the TANDBERG MPS will automatically transmit this new site’s Dual Video to the rest of the sites if possible.
If H.239 or BFCP is not supported by a H.320 site, the TANDBERG MPS uses High Speed Data rates (HSD) for DuoVideo
TF
. If any of these sites does not support HSD, DuoVideo
TF
will still be transmitted to the sites supporting this. The sites not supporting HSD will in that case receive the same video stream as the others see on their main video (and therefore not use all of their available meeting rate).
Dual Video Streams are available in both Continuous Presence mode (CP) and Voice Switched mode or when one site has the floor, regardless of which site is broadcasted on the main stream.
Note that when running DuoVideo
TF
the video algorithm for the main stream will not be H.264.
In the TANDBERG MPS there is limited support for a mix of DuoVideo
TF
and H.239/BFCP in the same conference. Other manufacturer’s systems supporting neither DuoVideo
TF
nor H.239/BFCP can be in the same conference when the second video stream is sent, but they will not be able to receive the second stream. In a mixed conference, it is not possible to take over floor without releasing the current floor holder first.
Automatic Bandwidth Adjustment
When Dual Video is sent to the sites, the TAND-
BERG MPS will automatically use approximately
1/2 of the original video bandwidth for the main video stream and the other half for Dual Video.
When Dual Video is no longer transmitted, the
TANDBERG MPS will automatically upspeed the main video stream to its original bandwidth.
The TANDBERG MPS is capable of receiving/ transmitting two simultaneous video signals from/to all sites.
1.
When one of the sites requests for Dual
Video the TANDBERG MPS will open Dual
Administrator Guide
Contact us
The ITU standard H.264
The ITU standard H.264 provides considerably better video quality at lower bandwidths.
It has been developed with strong TANDBERG participation in joint workgroups of ITU-T and ISO.
!"
H.264 is based on the ISO standard MPEG-4.
!"
The TANDBERG MPS supports H.264 video compression in both CIF and SIF resolutions.
!"
An encoding and decoding rate of a high-quality 30 frames per second is achieved.
!"
H.264 may be used on the TANDBERG MPS for endpoint up to 768kbps.
Optimal Voice Switch
In Optimal Voice Switched mode the MPS will automatically send the optimal video quality to all participants capable of receiving the video quality of the active speaker.
!"
To get the optimal quality video, no icons or text are added to the video in this mode.
!"
If there is a site on the conference connected on H.320 special means are taken to ensure optimal interworking.
!"
Sites on H.320 will receive transcoded video while sites on IP will receive switched video.
159
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
About other features
IP Adaptive Bandwidth Management
The MCU never produces more traffic than needed, for better utilization of network resources.
Most of the data sent in a videoconference is video data. Thus, by incorporating smart video algorithms, the codec sends no more video data than necessary. Little movement in the picture gives low bit rate; while a lot of movement gives higher bit rate.
The MCU regulates outgoing and incoming media bit rates by means of flow control signalling.
An example of this is automatic adjustment of total bandwidth used when DuoVideo
TF
is opened.
Using the MPS System status
Asymmetrical Encoders and Decoders
Realizing there are many different types of videoconferencing units in the world that do not support the same video and audio algorithms,
TANDBERG has implemented asymmetrical encoders and decoders.
This feature allows different systems with different video and audio algorithms to communicate with the TANDBERG MPS without having to settle on the best common protocols.
The asymmetrical nature of the TANDBERG MPS allows the MCU to accept any of its supported algorithms in any combination from any site and will always transmit the highest possible quality video and audio to the far end.
By this, the TANDBERG MPS can send H.263 and receive H.264 at the same time.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Lip Sync
IP is an asynchronous network that sends audio and video separately. It is easy to see that these two streams may not arrive at their destination at the same time. Lip sync problems are a certainty if precautions are not taken in the implementation of the codec.
TANDBERG MPS supports sequencing of the video and audio IP packets and the reassembly and reordering of these packets at the destination if they are received out of order. If the video stream is received before the audio stream, the
TANDBERG MPS will buffer this data until the necessary audio is received and reassemble the data that the destination codec will use to reproduce a clear image with exceptional sound quality and lip sync.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Latency & Jitter
Latency
is defined as the time between a node sending a message and receipt of the message by another node.
TANDBERG MPS can handle any value of latency however, the higher the latency, the longer the delay in video and audio. This may lead to conferences with undesirable delays causing participants to interrupt and speak simultaneously.
Jitter
is defined as the difference in latency.
Where constant latency simply produces delays in audio and video, jitter can have a more adverse effect. Jitter causes packets to arrive out of order or at the wrong times, which again leads to packet loss.
TANDBERG MPS can manage packets with jitter up to 200ms. If excessive packet loss is detected, the TANDBERG MPS will downspeed the connection until acceptable packet loss is achieved.
Flow Control (Downspeeding
TF
)
The TANDBERG MPS uses Flow Control to control the amount of information being received from each endpoint. If the TANDBERG MPS requires bandwidth to be changed, the TANDBERG MPS will use Flow Control to request the other endpoint to drop the bandwidth.
If the ISDN networks drops channels during a call, the conference will not shut down but adjust to the remaining number of available channels. This ability is called “Downspeeding” and is in accordance to the BONDING Mode 1 standard.
ISDN Downspeeding will be started when one of the following actions occurs:
1.
Fallback to 2xH.221 call when no BONDING framing is found
2.
Non-matching number of channels (N) during
BONDING setup (e.g. N=4 on site A, N=6 on site B)
3.
Downspeeding during call setup caused by a channel that will not connect
4.
Disconnect and downspeed if a channel will not sync
5.
Downspeeding when detecting B-channels that are looped
6.
Downspeeding if a channel drops during the call
The TANDBERG system will start the BONDING synchronization procedure if there is a long fatal failure situation:
7.
Extended loss of H.221 framing
8.
Continuous BCH framing error in the video stream. If then a channel fails to sync, it will be disconnected (as mentioned in 4.)
Packet Loss
This feature comes also in handy when using
H.323 over networks with poor QoS such as the
Internet.
If TANDBERG MPS detects excessive packet loss, it will use Flow Control to downspeed the far end to overcome the packet loss problem.
Packet loss can occur when routers become overloaded and discard packets or when the receiving video system cannot keep up with the transmitting video system.
Downspeeding on IP
The TANDBERG system follows a multilevel intelligent adaptive algorithm based on measured packet loss when downspeeding on IP.
Different from the ISDN downspeeding, the system will not change Audio and Video algorithms during the downspeeding of an IP call.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
160
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
About other features,
cont...
Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery (IPLR
TF
)
IPLR is an ITU standard based packet loss compensation for
H.323 that improves received video into the TANDBERG MPS.
IPLR supports all video protocols and resolutions that TAND-
BERG MPS already has implemented and is compatible with all terminals and Gateways. This method works with other vendors’ endpoints as well as MCUs. Video quality is improved on the transmitted and received video streams.
IPLR is a special algorithm developed at TANDBERG that will make efforts to reconstruct the lost packets and reduce the visual effects caused by packet losses.
If the TANDBERG MPS experiences packet loss from an endpoint, it will ask the endpoint to handle packet loss. This requires Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery functionality on the endpoint.
See White Paper TANDBERG and Packet Loss on http://www.tandberg.com/docs for details on the IPLR
TF
feature.
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Inband Changing of Video and Audio Algorithms
TANDBERG MPS is able to change its video and audio algorithms
‘on the fly’ during a conference. This is valuable when switching between the live user image (CIF) and the live PC (XGA, SVGA,
VGA).
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Transcoding and Ratematching
Audio:
Transcoding: Each of the sites is negotiating the audio algorithm individually. So in a Multipoint call we support any combination of all the supported audio codecs (G.711, G.722, G.722.1, G.728,
MPEG-4 AAC-LD). The same goes for ratematching, any combination is supported.
Video:
All sites are divided into groups of similar coding (H.261, H.263 and H.264) and rate capabilities. The number of groups and their properties depends on the sites connected to the conference. During a conference call, group properties might change, and also sites might move between groups.
161
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Distributed MCUs
Cascaded MPS
The TANDBERG MPS supports two-level cascading, so the
TANDBERG MPS can be cascaded with other TANDBERG MPSs to increase the number of participants in one conference.
By simply dialling from one TANDBERG MPS to other TANDBERG
MPSs one will achieve a distributed setup.
In this case the TANDBERG MPS dialling out will be defined as the master MCU and all other MCUs as slaves.
The connection between the MCUs (or the Endpoints) can be IP,
ISDN or V.35.
The slave MCUs will automatically be set to Voice Switched while the master MCU may be set to one of the CP layouts or kept in Voice Switched mode.
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Features supported within a distributed MCU scenario:
!"
DuoVideo
TF
from any site
!"
Encryption (as long as all sites support this feature)
!"
Request Floor from any site
!"
View Site naming (of any site in the conference)
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Administrator features (on TANDBERG MPS or TMS):
!"
View site names (terminal list) of all participants
!"
Configure the conference as Master, Slave or Auto
!"
Auto – The MCU dialling out will become Master
!"
Master/Slave status on Web
!"
Conference Layout disabled on Slave MCU
!"
Assign Floor from Master MCU
!"
Shows the site in full screen for all participants
!"
Assign Floor from Slave MCU
!"
Shows the site in full screen for all participants
!"
Only to sites on this MCU
!
A distributed MCU scenario may add delays to the switching of conference.
162
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started
Ports and Packet Sizes
Layer 4 Ports Used in H.323 Meetings
Using the MPS
TCP and UDP Ports
The following TCP and UDP ports are relevant for the TANDBERG MPS.
Function
Gatekeeper RAS
Gatekeeper Discovery
Q.931 Call Setup
H.245 / Q.931
Video
Audio
Data / FECC
SSH
Telnet
HTTP
HTTPS
SNMP (Queries)
SNMP (Traps)
TCP and UDP Ports for TANDBERG MPS
Port Type Direction
1719 UDP <=>
80
443
161
162
224.0.1.41:1718
1720
Range 5555 - 6555
Range 2326 - 6951
Range 2326 - 6951
Range 2326 - 6951
22
23
UDP
TCP*
TCP
UDP
UDP
UDP
TCP*
TCP*
TCP*
TCP
UDP
TCP
<=>
<=>
<=>
<=>
<=>
<=>
<=>
<=>
<=>
<=>
<=>
=> (outgoing from MCU)
* Listening sockets
System status
Outgoing H.323 call:
First call uses 5555 for outgoing Q.931 and 5556 for H.245, next uses 5557 for Q.931 and 5558 for H.245, etc.
Incoming H.323 call:
First call uses 5555 for H.245, second 5556 etc. until it reaches 6555. It will then start on 5555 again, unless the TANDBERG MPS has been restarted in the meantime.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Ports for TMS
Ports TMS (TANDBERG Management Suite) uses for communicating with the TANDBERG MPS
Port
443
80
161 UDP
Ports TMS uses with TANDBERG MPS
Functions Protocol
Read system info/status HTTPS
Give dial commands
Get call log
Events like boot, disconnect etc HTTP traps to TMS
Check system status SNMP Commands
If HTTPS (port 443) is not available on the endpoint, HTTP (port 80) will be used instead
IP Packet Sizes
Audio: The TANDBERG MPS is sending maximum 320 bytes of audio per packet.
Video:
The TANDBERG MPS is sending maximum 1400 bytes of video per packet.
In addition, the system needs to add the following header information (40 bytes in total) for each of the audio and video packets above:
!"
20 bytes IP-header
!"
8 bytes UDP-header
!"
12 bytes RTP-header
Packet loss:
Packet loss is displayed in the conference overview of the TANDBERG MPS, see MCU
Conference Overview. The number shown is the average of audio- and video- packets that are lost during the last 2 seconds.
163
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Secure Conference (Encryption)
Built-In Encryption
The TANDBERG MPS has built-in encryption of audio, video and data for:
!"
H.323 meetings (based on ITU standard H.235 v2&v3)
!"
H.320 meetings (based on ITU standard H.233 and H.234)
Common Secret Key
The establishment of the common secret key is done through the computation of a Diffie-Hellman (DH) algorithm. The DH method uses primes numbers of 512 bits length for DES and 1024 bits for AES.
NOTE: Encrypted SIP calls is a Beta feature, and you should not run with Encrypted SIP calls in a production environment, it has limited support and is for evaluation and testing use only.
Shared Secret Key
The shared secret key is then used as a key for the selected encryption algorithm, which encrypts the session keys. When the session key is collected by the remote end, encryption of the audio, video and data channels can start.
Encryption Mode
The administrator decides, when setting up the conference, whether or not a conference shall be in encrypted mode or in unencrypted mode. It is not possible to change the mode when the conference is active with calls.
Establishment of Encryption
The encryption will be established automatically when all endpoints in the conference supports encryption, with automatic key generation (and the conference is set up for encryption mode of operation).
Encryption Algorithm
The encryption algorithms used in the TANDBERG system are:
!"
The Data Encryption Standard (DES) with a 56 bits session key
!"
The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) with a 128 bits session key
Encryption Support
Encryption is supported on all bandwidths. Encryption is also supported for DuoVideo
TF
and H.239.
For an encrypted conference, all endpoints must support AES or
DES encryption.
Typical Setup of an Encrypted Call
Although there are some differences between H.323 and H.320, a typical set-up of an encrypted call can be defined as follow:
1.
Establishment of a common secret key and selection of an encryption algorithm.
2.
Exchange of keys according to the common secret key and the selected encryption algorithm.
3.
Start the encryption.
Encryption Configuration
Encryption is configured when you create a conference or a conference template from the web interface, see
!"
If Encryption Mode is set to Auto, the TANDBERG MPS accepts both AES and DES encryption.
!"
If Encryption Mode is set to AES, all participants must have
AES in order to join the conference.
Scenarios
!"
If a site entering an encrypted conference does not support encryption, a picture will be shown, informing that the conference requires encryption.
!"
If a site connected to an encrypted conference starts sending unencrypted data, that site will be taken out of the conference.
!"
If the TANDBERG MPS administrator has forced the MCU to require only e.g. AES encryption then, all participants must have AES in order to join the conference.
For more information on AES and DES please visit the National
Institute of Standards and Technology at http://www.nist.gov
.
For more details see the
White Paper TANDBERG MCU and IP and the White Paper TANDBERG Security documents on http://www.tandberg.com/docs .
164
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status
System Management Tools
System Management Tools
TANDBERG provides a comprehensive set of system management tools, and is committed to the use of standards-based tools.
Management using a standard Web-browser
The web-browser is the most common way to manage the TANDBERG MPS giving access to all managing features of the MCU.
Using a standard Web-browser (Mozilla Firefox,
MS Internet Explorer 5.0 or later), the user may perform all forms of meeting set-up and control, but also diagnostics, troubleshooting and software upgrade.
The TANDBERG MPS can be managed in many ways:
!"
The internal web server allows for remote control of the MCU using a web interface from anywhere on the LAN/WAN/Internet
(open browser http://System Controller
Board-ipaddress).
!"
SSH and Telnet for local control and diagnostics.
!"
The TANDBERG Management Suite (TMS) may also be used to manage the system and the TANDBERG Scheduler may be used to schedule conference meetings (Optional).
!"
XML and SOAP interface for full management of MPS through remote application.
Open a web browser and enter:
!"
<http://MPS IP Address> or
!" <https://MPS IP Address>
!"
Example: < http://10.0.5.203>
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Management using a SSH Client
The TANDBERG MPS also supports remote login through Secure Shell (SSH).This gives the user the same functionality as from the web interface. In addition it provides the user with advanced debug capabilities. Both ends of the client/server connection are authenticated using a digital certificate, and passwords are protected by being encrypted.
This interface is a command-line type interface, not a graphical interface like the Web-browser interface. The system supports multiple simultaneous SSH sessions.
See the TANDBERG MPS API guide for details on the API commands available via SSH.
Management using XML
System Management by using XML can be done from
System Configuration > XML Document
.
The XML Uploading page, allows administrators to upload configuration changes to the MPS in one go, instead of manually setting each entry via the web interface.
Management using SOAP
By using the MPS WSDL file, developers can manage the MPS through SOAP web services.
The wsdl file can be accessed on the MPS through a standard web browser at
<http://<MPS IP Address/webservices.
wsdl>
These web services reflect the same functionality as can be found in the document:
<http://MPS IP Address/command.xml>
Management using TMS
Management of the MPS can also be achieved by registering the MPS with TMS (TANDBERG
Management Suite).
Once registered to TMS, administrators will be able to update many of the MPS settings.
TMS users will also have the ability to automatically schedule conferences on the MPS using the settings defined in TMS.
Backup & Restore
From the TMS (TANDBERG Management Suite) administrators can backup and restore the configuration.
Management using a standard Telnet Client
This gives the user the same functionality as SSH and provides the user with advanced debug capabilities. The interface is a commandline type interface.
The system supports multiple simultaneous
Telnet sessions.
Using SCP for Personal Conferences and
Gateway Rules backup.
1.
Login to the MPS using an SCP program such as WinSCP (Note that SSH must be enabled on the MPS to use SCP).
2.
The user name will be “ root” and the password will be the normal MPS password
(default is TANDBERG).
3.
Navigate to the “ persistent” folder.
!"
For Personal Conferences copy the
<conferencedefinitions.xml> file
!"
For Gateway rules copy the
<mappingrules.xml> file
Read about the API commands in the
TANDBERG MPS API Guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs .
165
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status
System Management and Security
HTTPS
The TANDBERG MPS supports HTTPS in order to ensure secure transmission of the information displayed on the administrator’s PC.
A secure connection between the Web browser and the TANDBERG MPS (the MCU web server) will be established if the HTTPS service on the
MCU is enabled.
HTTPS allows for password exchange, which is especially important.
Disable Services
For security reasons you may want to disable some of the services provided by the TAND-
BERG MPS. If wanted the following services may be disabled/enabled (either through the web-interface or with API commands):
!"
Telnet
!"
HTTP
!"
HTTPS
!"
SSH
!"
SNMP, may also be set to read only or traps only (only with API commands)
Enable HTTPS using API Command
1.
To enable HTTPS, you can use the API command service:
< xconfiguration HTTPS Mode: On>
2. Restart:
The HTTPS service will be activated at next restart.
Enable HTTPS using Web Interface
1.
To enable HTTPS, navigate to System Configuration > Misc > Services and set
HTTPS to On.
2.
Press
Save
button to save the changes.
3.
Press
Restart
button. The HTTPS service will be activated at next restart.
Disable Services using API Commands
Disable Telnet Service
< xconfiguration Telnet Mode: Off>
Disable HTTP Service
< xconfiguration HTTP Mode: Off>
Disable HTTP Service
< xconfiguration HTTPS Mode: Off>
Disable SSH Service
< xconfiguration SSH Mode: Off>
Disable SNMP Service
< xconfiguration SNMP Mode: Off/ReadOnly/TrapsOnly>
HTTP and HTTPS Service
If both the MCUs
HTTP
and
HTTPS
services are activated, the user will automatically be redirected to
HTTPS
.
If HTTP is deactivated, you will have to specify
HTTPS
. In this case https://10.0.5.203 will work, but not http://10.0.5.203.
Disable Services using the Web Interface
1.
To disable HTTP/HTTPS/Telnet/SSH, navigate to System Configuration > Misc >
Services and set HTTPS , HTTPS , Telnet or
SSH
to Off.
2.
Press Save button to save the changes.
3.
Press
Restart
button. The service(s) will be deactivated at next restart.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Secure Shell (SSH)
The TANDBERG MPS supports SSH (Secure
Shell) for secure access to the system.
SSH commands are encrypted and secured in several ways. Both ends of the client/server connection are authenticated using a digital certificate, and passwords are protected by being encrypted.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Security Alert
The system can notify management applications when someone tries remote access over
IP with illegal password (via SNMP traps).
Information about the intruder’s IP-address and the service used (Web, Telnet and FTP) will be given.
When the (optional) TANDBERG Management
Suite (TMS) is used, an email notification may also be sent e.g. to the network administrator.
Read about the API commands in the
TANDBERG MPS API Guide. Go to: http://www.tandberg.com/docs .
166
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Product Approvals and CE Declarations
The product has been approved by various international approval agencies, among others: CSA and Nemko. According to their
Follow-Up Inspection Scheme, these agencies also perform production inspections at a regular basis, for all production of
TANDBERG’s equipment.
The test reports and certificates issued by the approval agencies show that the TANDBERG MPS complies with the following standards.
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY TANDBERG MPS 200
MANUFACTURER: TANDBERG Telecom AS
PRODUCT NAME: TANDBERG MPS 200
TYPE NUMBER: TTC3-02
DESCRIPTION: Media Processing System
This product complies with Commission Directives:
LVD 73/23/EEC
EMC 89/336/EEC
R&TTE 99/5/EEC
EMC Emission - Radiated Electromagnetic Interference
!"
EN55022:1994 + A1:1995 + A2:1997 (CISPR 22:1993 +
Corr. and Am.1 and Am.2) Class A (Comply with EU’s Commission Decision 89/336/EEC).
!"
FCC Rules and Regulations Part 15, Subpart B, Class A.
This product complies with harmonized standards:
EN 60950-1 : 2001
EN 55022 : 1994, A1/A2
EN 55024 : 1998, A1/A2
EN 61000-3-2 : 2000
EN 61000-3-3 : 1995, A1
TBR 4 Layer 1, 2 and 3
EMC Immunity
!"
EN 55024:1998 + A1:2001 + A2: 2003
!"
EN 61000-3-2:2000
!"
EN 61000-3-3:1995 + A1:2001
!"
(Comply with EU’s Commission Decision 89/336/EEC).
TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION FILE NO.: X13513
YEAR WHICH THE CE-MARK WAS AFFIXED: 2005
For an official, signed version of this document, or details regarding documentation from the technical construction file, please contact TANDBERG
Electrical Safety
!"
IEC 60950-1 edition 2001
!"
EN 60950-1 edition 2001 +A11:2004
!"
UL 60950-1. 1st Edition
!"
CSA 60950-1-03
A Class Product Declaration
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY TANDBERG MPS 800
MANUFACTURER: TANDBERG Telecom AS
PRODUCT NAME: TANDBERG MPS 800
TYPE NUMBER: TTC3-01
DESCRIPTION: Media Processing System
This product complies with Commission Directives:
LVD 73/23/EEC
EMC 89/336/EEC
R&TTE 99/5/EEC
This product complies with harmonized standards:
EN 60950-1 : 2001
EN 55022 : 1994, A1/A2
EN 55024 : 1998, A1/A2
EN 61000-3-2 : 2000
EN 61000-3-3 : 1995, A1
TBR 4 Layer 1, 2 and 3
TECHNICAL CONSTRUCTION FILE NO.: D13391
YEAR WHICH THE CE-MARK WAS AFFIXED: 2004
For an official, signed version of this document, or details regarding documentation from the technical construction file, please contact TANDBERG.
! "
#$ A %&'()*+,-.(/&'0123456789:);<=>?(01@ABCDE
89FGHI0JKLM:
WARNING:
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
167
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
SIP - Current RFC’s and Drafts Supported
The following current RFC’s and drafts are supported:
!"
RFC 1889 RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-time Applications
!"
RFC 2190 RTP Payload Format for H.263 Video Streams
!"
RFC 2327 SDP: Session Description Protocol
!"
RFC 2396 Uniform Resource Identifiers (URI): Generic Syntax
!"
RFC 2429 RTP Payload Format for the 1998 Version of ITU-T Rec.
H.263 Video (H.263+)
!"
RFC 2617 Digest Authentication
!"
RFC 2782 DNS RR for specifying the location of services (DNS
SRV)
!"
RFC 2833 RTP Payload for DTMF Digits, Telephony Tones and
Telephony Signals
!"
RFC 2976 The SIP INFO Method
!"
RFC 3016 RTP Payload Format for MPEG-4 Audio/Visual Streams
!"
RFC 3047 RTP Payload Format for ITU-T Recommendation
G.722.1
!"
RFC 3261 SIP: Session Initiation Protocol
!"
RFC 3262 Reliability of Provisional Responses in SIP
!"
RFC 3263 Locating SIP Servers
!"
RFC 3264 An Offer/Answer Model with SDP
!"
RFC 3311 UPDATE method
!"
RFC 3361 DHCP Option for SIP Servers
!"
RFC 3420 Internet Media Type message/sipfrag
!"
RFC 3515 Refer method
!"
RFC 3550 RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time Applications
!"
RFC 3581 Symmetric Response Routing
!"
RFC 3605 RTCP attribute in SDP
!"
RFC 3711 The Secure Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP)
!"
RFC 3840 Indicating User Agent Capabilities in SIP
!"
RFC 3890 A Transport Independent Bandwidth Modifier for SDP
!"
RFC 3891 The SIP “Replaces” Header
!"
RFC 3892 Referred-By Mechanism
!"
RFC 3960 Early Media
!"
RFC 3984 RTP Payload Format for H.264 Video
!"
RFC 4028 Session Timers in SIP
!"
RFC 4145 TCP-Based Media Transport in the SDP
!"
RFC 4566 SDP: Session Description Protocol
!"
RFC 4568 SDP:Security Descriptions for Media Streams
!"
FC 4574 The Session Description Protocol (SDP) Label Attribute
!"
RFC 4582 The Binary Floor Control Protocol
!"
RFC 4583 Format for Binary Floor Control Protocol (BFCP)
Streams
!"
RFC 4585 Extended RTP Profile for RTCP-Based Feedback
!"
RFC 4587 RTP Payload Format for H.261 Video Streams
!"
RFC 4629 RTP Payload Format for ITU-T Rec. H.263 Video
!"
RFC 4796 The Session Description Protocol (SDP) Content Attribute
!" draft-ietf-xcon-bfcp-connection-04.txt
!" draft-levin-mmusic-xml-media-control-08.txt
!" draft-ietf-sipping-cc-transfer-07.txt
!" draft-kristensen-avt-rtp-h264-extension-00.txt
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Administrator Guide
Contact us
168
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Q:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589
Configuring Microsoft Office Live Communications
Server (LCS) 2005, SP1
This section will illustrate how to setup the Live Communication Server (LCS) to work properly with the MPS.
SIP (Session Initiated Protocol)
Software version J3 and above for the TANDBERG MPS has support for the Session Initiated Protocol (SIP).
The first version of support will be compatible with the
Microsoft Live Communications Server (LCS) 2005, SP1.
LCS will serve as both an authentication authority and a
SIP Proxy to the MPS for both incoming and outgoing SIP calls.
Configuring LCS and MPS
1.
The Microsoft Live Communication Server (LCS) should be configured prior to configuring the MPS unit.
2.
In order to facilitate proper communication between the MPS and LCS, the LCS must be configured to see the MPS as a trusted site as well as setup the dialplan to forward appropriate calls to the MPS.
Configuring LCS
In order for the MPS to receive calls on the SIP network, the LCS is configured to allow the MPS to receive multiple calls on multiple Dial In numbers.
LCS dialling works on a prefix basis:
!"
A specific prefix is assigned to forward all calls to a specific host. This prefix can be anything and is usually followed by a wildcard identifier * .
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Contact us
169
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Q:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589R
cont...
Configuring Microsoft Office Live Communications
Server (LCS) 2005, SP1
This section will illustrate how to setup the Live Communication Server (LCS) to work properly with the MPS.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Login and Locate the Server
1.
Login to the Live Communication Server
2.
Open the Live Communication Server snap-in for
MMC.
3.
Expand the tree to locate the server you wish the MPS to use as its home server.
4.
Once located right-click on the server’s icon and select
Properties
.
5.
In the Properties dialog select the Host Authorization tab to add a new authorized (trusted) host.
Add a Trusted Host
This setup will allow the LCS to authenticate the MPS and treat it as a trusted host within LCS
1.
Select the
Host Authorization
tab
2.
Press the
Add...
button to add a new authorized host.
3.
In the Add Authorized Host window, set the server selection to IP Address and enter the IP address of the System Controller Board of the MPS.
4.
The selection boxes for
Throttle As Server
and
Treat
As Authenticated
should be checked.
5.
Once the trusted host configuration has been completed, press OK to save the changes.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
170
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Q:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589R
cont...
Configuring Microsoft Office Live Communications
Server (LCS) 2005, SP1
This section will illustrate how to setup the Live Communication Server (LCS) to work properly with the MPS.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Add a Route
When the MPS is configured as an Authorized Host to the
LCS, the LCS needs to be told what SIP URIs should be forwarded to the MPS. This is done by configuring a route in the Live Communication Server.
The SIP URI to reach the MPS will be the combination of the User and Domain fields.
Under the same server properties window (see previous page), select the
Routing
tab and press
Add…
to open the Add Static Route dialog and add a new routing pattern:
1.
The User field is used to specify which URIs will be forwarded by this rule. Wildcards (
*
) are allowed.
2.
In the Domain box, enter the domain that will be used with the SIP URI for the MPS. The SIP URI to reach the
MPS will be the combination of the user and domain fields. Example: <
3.
Under Next Hop , select IP Address and enter the IP address of the System Controller Board of the MPS.
4.
Set Transport to TCP
5.
Set
Port
to
5060
.
6.
Press the OK button to save the route
7.
Press the OK button to close the properties window of the server.
Example #1:
If you want all calls coming in to <
MPS> to be forwarded to the MPS, enter <MPS> in the
User field.
LCS does allow a wildcard entry. Enter the <
*> character if a wildcard entry is desired. For example, if all calls beginning with <MPS> should be forwarded to the MPS itself (e.g. <
[email protected]>, <[email protected]>, <[email protected]>), then enter <MPS*> in the user field.
This completes the configuration of the LCS server. Next, the MPS will need to be configured to use the LCS server.
In the
Domain
box, enter the domain that will be used with the SIP URI for the MPS. The complete SIP URI to reach the MPS will be the combination of the user and domain fields. Example: <
Under
Next Hop
, select
IP Address
and enter the IP address of the controller card of the MPS. Make sure
Transport
is set to
TCP
and
Port is
5060
. The completed route should look like the figure to the left. Press
OK
to save the route, and press
OK
again to close the Properties window of the server.
171
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Q:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589R
cont...
SIP Configuring on the MPS
This section will illustrate how to setup the MPS for SIP. The Microsoft
Live Communication Server (LCS) should be configured prior to the MPS unit.
The MPS configuration consists of ensuring the MPS has a valid DNS name server configured and entering the LCS server information.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
SIP Configuration
To configure the MPS for SIP communication, navigate to System Configuration > SIP:
1.
Set
SIP Mode
to
On
2.
Configure the Interface for SIP communication. Enter the
DNS Name or IP Address for the SIP server in the Address field and set the SIP
Server
Type
to
Microsoft
3.
Press the
Save
button for the changes to take effect.
Please refer to section
System Configuration > SIP Configuration
for more details.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
172
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Q:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589R
cont...
DNS Server Configuration on the MPS
The LCS SIP operation requires the MPS to have a valid DNS (Domain
Name System) server configured.
System status
!
If the DNS server is not configured properly, calls may connect to the MPS, but neither video nor audio will be transmitted to the far end.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
DNS Configuration
To configure the DNS server on the MPS, navigate to System Configuration > IP:
Locate the configuration for the particular Service Controller Interface the system will use and enter the
IP Address
of the Domain Name Server
(DNS) Interface 1. Up to five DNS addresses can be configured.
Reboot the MPS
After having configured both the SIP and IP settings you must reboot the
MPS.
!"
Press the Restart button to reboot the MPS.
SIP is only supported on DNS Interface 1.
Please refer to section
System Configuration > IP Configuration
for more details.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
173
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Q:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589R
cont...
Verify the Configuration
Once the MPS has restarted, the Overview page of the MPS should show that the SIP status is Server Active .
Verify that the configuration is active before you continue.
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Configuring SIP Dial In Numbers
When
Server Active
has been verified, it is time to configure the appropriate SIP Dial In Numbers for the MPS system. Navigate to MCU Configuration > Dial In Numbers.
Within this screen, enter all the appropriate SIP URIs for the appropriate
Dial In Conferences and Single Dial In Numbers.
All SIP URIs, configured in the MPS, must be fully qualified domain
names with the domain name that is configured under the Routing
configuration within the LCS.
The prefix, entered under the Routing configuration, must be
included within all of the SIP names for the MPS to properly receive the calls.
Once all of the dial-in URIs are configured, the MPS is ready to make and receive SIP calls from other SIP devices registered to the LCS network.
Example #1:
If the domain name for the LCS server is < lcs.int> and the SIP prefix for the MPS was configured as <
MPS*>, your dial in numbers must begin with <
MPS> and end with <@lcs.int> in order to be valid, e.g.:
<
<
<
<
Administrator Guide
Contact us
174
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Z:5&=EEH&!*D&I95&0#1&589
Configuring Microsoft Office Communications Server
(OCS) 2007
This section will illustrate how to setup the Office Communication Server (OCS) to work properly with the MPS
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
SIP (Session Initiated Protocol)
Software version J3 and above for the TANDBERG MPS has support for the Session Initiated Protocol (SIP).
Todays version of support is compatible with the Microsoft Office Communications Server (OCS) 2007.
OCS will serve as both an authentication authority and a
SIP Proxy to the MPS for both incoming and outgoing SIP calls.
Configuring OCS and MPS
1.
The Microsoft Office Communication Server (OCS) should be configured prior to configuring the MPS unit.
2.
In order to facilitate proper communication between the MPS and OCS, the OCS must be configured to see the MPS as a trusted site as well as setup the dialplan to forward appropriate calls to the MPS.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
TCP Connections
TCP connections are not enabled on OCS by default. If not done already, you need to open for TCP connections.
Configuring the TCP connections:
1.
Expand the
Front Ends
and right-click the OCS Server which you want to configure.
2.
Click
Properties
for the chosen server and then click
Add...
to configure the TCP connections:
!"
IP Address:
All
!"
Port:
5060
!"
Transport: TCP
175
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Z:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589R
cont...
Configuring Microsoft Office Communications Server
(OCS) 2007
This section will illustrate how to setup the Office Communication Server (OCS) to work properly with the MPS
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Login and Locate the Server
1.
Log on to the Office Communications Server 2007 server as a member of the
RTCUniversalServerAdmins group.
2.
Open Office Communications Server 2007.
3.
In the console tree, expand the forest node, and then do one of the following:
!"
For an Enterprise pool , expand Enterprise pools, expand the pool, right-click Front Ends, and then click Properties.
!"
For a
Standard Edition Server
, expand Standard
Edition servers, right-click the pool, click Properties, and then click Front End Properties.
Add a Trusted Host
This setup will allow the OCS to authenticate the MPS and treat it as a trusted host within OCS
1.
In the Front End Properties select the Host Authorization
tab, press the
Add...
button to add a new authorized host. a.
In the Add Authorized Host window, set the server selection to
IP Address
and enter the IP address of the System Controller Board of the MPS. b.
The selection box Treat As Authenticated must be checked.
2.
Once the trusted host configuration has been completed, press
OK
to save the changes.
Press the Add...
button to bring up the
Add Authorized Host
dialog.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
176
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Z:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589R
cont...
Configuring Microsoft Office Communications Server
(OCS) 2007
This section will illustrate how to setup the Office Communication Server (OCS) to work properly with the MPS
System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Add a Route
When the MPS is configured as an Authorized Host to the
OCS, the OCS needs to be told what SIP URIs should be forwarded to the MPS. This is done by configuring a route in the Office Communication Server.
The SIP URI to reach the MPS will be the combination of the User and Domain fields.
Under the same server properties window (see previous page), select the Routing tab and press Add… to open the Add Static Route dialog and add a new routing pattern:
1.
In the
Domain
box, enter the domain that will be used with the SIP URI for the MPS. The domain name must be a unique domain name and 0/-&".$''(-G$1*"with the domain name given in the MCU Configuration. The domain name is often maid unique by adding a prefix.
Example: mps.company.com
2.
Under Next Hop , select IP Address and enter the IP address of the System Controller Board of the MPS.
3.
Set Transport to TCP
4.
Set
Port
to
5060
.
5.
Press the
OK
button to save the route
6.
Press the OK button to close the properties window of the server.
Unless you need to open for TCP connections, this completes the configuration of the OCS server.
Wait for some time for the new routes and host authorization lists to be updated.
Using the Microsoft Office Communicator
Client (MOC)
1.
Enter the name of the personal conference in the Search field , just below the contact information field in your MOC client.
2.
The presence information should be propagated from the MPS, as
Available
if the conference is available.
3.
Right-click on the buddy that appears in the results field, and click Start a Video Call .
4.
To add the virtual meeting to your buddy list, right click on the buddy that appears in the results field and choose
Add to contact list .
The search field
The buddy and conferences list
Administrator Guide
Contact us
The result field
177
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Z:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589R
cont...
Configuring the MPS
The Microsoft Office Communication Server (OCS) should be configured prior to the MPS unit.
System status
The MPS configuration consists of ensuring the MPS has a valid DNS
Server configured and entering the Office Communication Server (OCS) information.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
SIP Configuration
To configure the MPS for SIP communication, navigate to System Configuration > SIP:
1.
Set
SIP Mode
to
On
2.
Set the
Address
to the Office Communications Server (OCS). This address must be a fully qualified domain name or an IP address.
3.
Set the
Type
to
Microsoft
4.
Set the
Transport Protocol
to
TCP
(default)
5.
Set the
TLS Verify
to
Off
6.
Press the
Save
button for the changes to take effect.
Please refer to section System Configuration > SIP Configuration
for more details.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
178
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Z:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589R
cont...
DNS Server Configuration
The OCS SIP operation requires the MPS to have a valid DNS (Domain
Name System) server configured.
System status
!
If the DNS server is not configured properly, calls may connect to the MPS, but neither video nor audio will be transmitted to the far end.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
DNS Configuration
To configure the DNS server on the MPS, navigate to System Configuration > IP:
Locate the configuration for the particular Service Controller Interface the system will use and enter the IP Address of the Domain Name Server
(DNS) Interface 1. Up to five DNS addresses can be configured.
Reboot the MPS
After having configured both the SIP and IP settings you must reboot the
MPS.
!"
Press the
Restart
button to reboot the MPS.
SIP is only supported on DNS Interface 1.
Please refer to section
System Configuration > IP Configuration
for more details.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
179
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS
:#*;2<1(*2&Z:5&!*D&I95&0#1&589R
cont...
Verify the Configuration
Once the MPS has restarted, the Overview page of the MPS should show that the SIP status is Server Active .
System status
Please verify that the configuration is active before you continue.
System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Configuring SIP Dial In Numbers
When
Server Active
has been verified, it is time to configure the appropriate SIP Dial In Numbers for the MPS system. Navigate to MCU Configuration > Dial In Numbers > Personal Conferences.
Within this screen, enter all the appropriate SIP URIs.
All SIP URIs, configured in the MPS, must be fully qualified domain
names with the domain name that is configured under the Routing
configuration within the OCS.
Once all of the dial-in URIs are configured, the MPS is ready to make and receive SIP calls from other SIP devices registered to the OCS network.
Administrator Guide
Contact us
Example #1:
If the domain name of the OCS server is < ocs.int>, and your subdomain for MPS calls is < mps.ocs.int>, your dial in numbers use the domain < mps.ocs.int>, e.g.:
“[email protected]” [email protected]
180
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
W/)X*()!"&5-/)(;)!'(#*%
TANDBERG MPS 200
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
:29=:>:"@[@X6:"52825=X[
MCU video ports: up to 40
MCU audio ports: up to 32
Gateway sessions: up to 20
Serial Interface ports: up to 64
ISDN-PRI ports: 16
:5>"5B?A6C6?56"@5#6S>;=?E
Advanced scheduling (Multiple MCUs) with TMS
Scheduling using the TANDBERG Scheduler, Microsoft
Outlook® or IBM Lotus Notes®
On-demand conferencing (true Ad Hoc)
Personal conferencing
Conference initiation using Microsoft Office Communicator (SIP-CX)
Send/recieve wide format
Automatic Continuous Presence switching
Common Layouts for 16:9 and 4:3 Formats
Standard CP (CP2, CP3, CP4, CP5+1, CP4+3, CP7+1,
CP9, CP8+2, CP12+1, CP12+2, CP16/auto)
Wide Screen CP (wCP2+1,wCP3, wCP3+1, wCP4, wCP4+1, wCP6, wCP8+1, wCP12, CP32)
Voice Switched
Self-view optional
Lecture mode
Embedded site naming with Unicode support
Active speaker indication in CP mode
Active speaker indication for telephones
:5>"5B?A6C6?56":2?2E6:6?X
Advanced conference monitoring with TMS Conference
Control Center
Centralized management and control via embedded web server
3rd Party API for external control (XML on HTTPS)
Live audio and video monitoring & diagnostics
Dual Snapshot of ongoing conference (JPEG)
Move participants between conferences
Auto dial out on personal conferences
Waiting room provided to attendees prior to conference start
Conference bandwidth threshold
Single or Multiple Dial In numbers per conference
10 Prefixes for Ad Hoc Conferencing
Caller ID conference routing
Mute audio and video to/from endpoints
Custom “Welcome” pages (JPEG)
Customizable conference messages
Lock participant layouts
Edit conference display text
Access to all conferences through Single Number Dial
In Interface (SNDI)
:5>"\=S6B"A62X>C6@
Up to 30 fps in Continuous Presence, Voice Switched and presentation mode
Best Impression — Automatic change of video image layout and resolution
:5>"5#2=C"5B?XCB;
Embedded control from TMS Conference Control Center and embedded web server
Endpoint control using H.243 Chair Control on H.320 and H.323
Endpoint control using BFCP Chair Control on SIP
Multi-language H.243 terminal names
:5>"2>S=B"A62X>C6@
Mute Audio to/from endpoints
Automatic gain control
Audio input level indications
Custom “welcome” sound (WAV)
Customizable conference messages (WAV)
Entry/Exit tones
Mobile telephone noise suppression
Telephone echo suppression
CD-quality audio using MPEG 4 AAC-LD
E2X6]2["A62X>C6@"TB8X=B?W
H.323 to/from H.320 (IP to ISDN)
H.323 to/from H.320 (IP to V.35)
GATEWAY ISDN CALL ROUTING
Direct Inward Dialling (DID)
Interactive Voice and Video Response (IV2R)
Automatic TCS-4 response on ISDN for automated bridging of IP islands
Any combination of DID, IV2R and TCS-4
Automatic downspeeding to available
ISDN or IP rate
E2X6]2["#ILKL"52;;"CB>X=?E"XB"=@S?
Single prefix dialling
Selectable 2x64k (H.221) dial-out
Automatic ISDN restrict
Automatic downspeed to available ISDN or IP rate
Load balance control
Call transfer of the IP side
6?S8B=?X@"@>88BCX6S
ISDN (H.320) video endpoints up to 2 Mbps
V.35 (H.320) video endpoints up to 2 Mbps
IP (H.323) video endpoints up to 2 Mbps
IP (SIP) video endpoints up to 2 Mbps
IP (3G) video phone up to 64 kbps
Microsoft Office Communicator (SIP-CX)*
Analog/IP telephony
6:U6SS6S"6?5C[8X=B?
Standards based on ISDN, IP and mixed ISDN/IP:
H.233, H.234, H.235 v2&v3, DES 56 bit key, AES
128 bit key
NIST-validated AES and DES
Automatic key generation and exchange
Mix of DES/AES possible in the same conference
;=\6"\=S6B"C6@B;>X=B?@
NATIVE PAL:
QCIF (176 x 144 pixels)
CIF (352 x 288 pixels)
448p (576 x 448 pixels)*
4CIF (704 x 576 pixels)
NATIVE NTSC:
SIF (352 x 240 pixels)
400p (528 x 400 pixels)*
4SIF (704 x 480 pixels)
NATIVE PC RESOLUTIONS:
VGA (640 x 480 pixels)
SVGA (800 x 600 pixels)
XGA (1024 x 768 pixels)
NATIVE WIDESCREEN RESOLUTIONS:
w288p (512 x 288 pixels) w448p (768 x 448 pixels) w576p (1023 x 576 pixels) w720p (1280 x 720p)
Administrator Guide
Contact us
XC2?@5BS=?E
Optimal Voice-Switched (oVS) Video: Intelligent
On-Demand Transcoding
Network transcoding (IP, ISDN-PRI and V.35)
Audio, video and protocol transcoding
Optimized picture layout for 3G phones
Bandwidths from 56 kbps — 2 Mbps in the same conference
@65>C=X["A62X>C6@
Network authentication (H.235)
Embedded audio/video encryption (H.235)
Secure management & control (HTTPS, SSH)
Participant authentication (password, Dial In number and caller ID)
IP administration passwords
Services may be disabled: Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP,
SSH
;=\6"8C6@6?X2X=B?@
Broadcast of presentations (DuoVideo
TF
, H.239 and
BFCP**)
=8"?6X]BC^"A62X>C6@
Expressway NAT and firewall traversal
Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery (IPLR)
Automatic call rate adjustments
URI dialling
QoS (DiffServ, IP Precedence and TOS)
H.245 DTMF tones in H.323
Centralized management via embedded web server using HTTPS, XML, SOAP, SSH and Telnet
1 x RS-232 for local control and diagnostics
Endpoints on two different IP networks in the same conference
Automatic/manual error control
IPv6 Enabled - IPv4-IPv6 Dual Stack
=@S?"?6X]BC^"A62X>C6@
ISDN-PRI E1/T1
ISDN PRI G.703 and E1/T1, Leased Line
Non-Facilities Associated Signaling (NFAS)
Automatic downspeeding
Automatic call rate adjustments
Advanced diagnostic tools
181
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
W/)X*()!"&5-/)(;)!'(#*%R
cont...
TANDBERG MPS 200
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Automatic/manual error control
?6X]BC^"=?X6CA256@
2 x LAN/ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbit on the system controller board
Up to 2 x LAN/ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbit for media processing board
Up to 16 x E1/T1 (RJ-45) for ISDN PRIs and/or G.703
Up to 64 x V.35/RS-366 ports
6X#6C?6XR=?X6C?6XR=?XC2?6X"5B??65X=\=X[
TCP/IP, SSL, ARP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, XML, SOAP
Embedded web server for total conference and call control
10/100 Mbps full/half duplex (manual or auto detect selection)
8B]6C
100–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz;
460W max. power consumption
>?=X"S=:6?@=B?@
Height 3U/133 mm/5.3”
Width 444 mm/17.4”
Depth 371 mm/14.6”
Net weight 20.9 lbs/9.5 kg
19” rack-mountable
* MCU only
** Binary Floor Control Protocol
BX#6C"@>88BCX6S"@X2?S2CS@
H.221, H.231, H.241, H.242, H.243, H.245, H.320,
H.239, H.323, BONDING (ISO 13871), Q.931, SIP,
H261, H263+, H264, G711, G.722, G.722.1, G728,
MPEG4 AAC-LD
All specifications subject to change without notice, system specifics may vary.
All images in these materials are for representational purposes only, actual products may d i f f e r.
TANDBERG and Expressway are registered trademarks or trademarks of TANDBERG in the U.S. and other countries.
All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
288CB\2;@
Directive 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive)
– Standard EN 60950
Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)
– Standard EN 55022, Class A
– Standard EN 55024
– Standard EN 61000-3-2/-3-3
Directive 1999/5/EEC (R&TTE Directive)
– Standard TBR4
Approved according to UL 60950 and
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 60950
Complies with FCC15B Class A
6?\=CB?:6?X2;"S2X2
Operating temperature:
0°C to 35°C (32°F to 95°F) ambient temperature
Relative Humidity (RH):
10% to 90%
Storage and transport temperature:
-20 to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F) at RH 10–90% (noncondensing)
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Administrator Guide
Contact us
182
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
W/)X*()!"&5-/)(;)!'(#*%R
cont...
TANDBERG MPS 800
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Contact us
:29=:>:"@[@X6:"52825=X[
MCU video ports: up to 160
MCU audio ports: up to 48
Gateway sessions: up to 80
Serial Interface ports: up to 128
ISDN-PRI ports: up to 32
:5>"5B?A6C6?56"@5#6S>;=?E
Advanced scheduling (Multiple MCUs) with TMS
Scheduling using the TANDBERG Scheduler, Microsoft
Outlook® or IBM Lotus Notes®
On-demand conferencing (true Ad Hoc)
Personal conferencing
Conference initiation using Microsoft Office
Communicator (SIP-CX)
Send/recieve wide format
Automatic Continuous Presence switching
Common Layouts for 16:9 and 4:3 Formats
Standard CP (CP2, CP3, CP4, CP5+1, CP4+3, CP7+1,
CP9, CP8+2, CP12+1, CP12+2, CP16/auto)
Wide Screen CP (wCP2+1,wCP3, wCP3+1, wCP4, wCP4+1, wCP6, wCP8+1, wCP12, CP32)
Voice Switched
Self-view optional
Lecture mode
Embedded site naming with Unicode support
Active speaker indication in CP mode
Active speaker indication for telephones
:5>"5B?A6C6?56":2?2E6:6?X
Advanced conference monitoring with TMS Conference
Control Center
Centralized management and control via embedded web server
3rd Party API for external control (XML on HTTPS)
Live audio and video monitoring & diagnostics
Dual Snapshot of ongoing conference (JPEG)
Move participants between conferences
Auto dial out on personal conferences
Waiting room provided to attendees prior to conference start
Conference bandwidth threshold
Single or Multiple Dial In numbers per conference
10 Prefixes for Ad Hoc Conferencing
Caller ID conference routing
Mute audio and video to/from endpoints
Custom “Welcome” pages (JPEG)
Customizable conference messages
Lock participant layouts
Edit conference display text
Access to all conferences through Single Number Dial
In Interface (SNDI)
:5>"\=S6B"A62X>C6@
Up to 30 fps in Continuous Presence, Voice Switched and presentation mode
Best Impression — Automatic change of video image layout and resolution
:5>"5#2=C"5B?XCB;
Embedded control from TMS Conference Control Center and embedded web server
Endpoint control using H.243 Chair Control on H.320 and H.323
Endpoint control using BFCP Chair Control on SIP
Multi-language H.243 Terminal Names
:5>"2>S=B"A62X>C6@
Mute audio to/from endpoints
Automatic gain control
Audio input level indications
Custom “welcome” sound (WAV)
Customizable conference messages (WAV)
Entry/Exit tones
Mobile telephone noise suppression
CD-quality audio using MPEG 4 AAC-LD
Telephone echo suppression
E2X6]2["A62X>C6@"TB8X=B?W
H.323 to/from H.320 (IP to ISDN)
H.323 to/from H.320 (IP to V.35)
E2X6]2["=@S?"52;;"CB>X=?E
Direct Inward Dialling (DID)
Interactive Voice and Video Response (IV2R)
Automatic TCS-4 response on ISDN for automated bridging of IP islands
Any combination of DID, IV2R and TCS-4
Automatic downspeeding to available ISDN or IP rate
Telephone Dial In can be disabled
E2X6]2["#ILKL"52;;"CB>X=?E"XB"=@S?
Single prefix dialling
Selectable 2x64k (H.221) dial-out
Automatic ISDN restrict and prefixes
Automatic downspeed to available ISDN or IP rate
Load balance control
Call transfer of the IP side
XC2?@5BS=?E
Optimal Voice-Switched (oVS) Video: Intelligent On-
Demand Transcoding
Network transcoding (IP, ISDN-PRI and V.35)
Audio, video and protocol transcoding
Optimized picture layout for 3G phones
Bandwidths from 56 kbps–2 Mbps in the same conference
6?S8B=?X@"@>88BCX6S
ISDN (H.320) video endpoints up to 2 Mbps
V.35 (H.320) video endpoints up to 2 Mbps
IP (H.323) video endpoints up to 2 Mbps
IP (SIP) video endpoints up to 2 Mbps
IP (3G) video phone up to 64 kbps
Microsoft Office Communicator (SIP-CX)*
Analog/IP telephony
6:U6SS6S"6?5C[8X=B?
Standards based on ISDN, IP and mixed
ISDN/IP: H.233, H.234, H.235 v2&v3, DES 56 bit key,
AES 128 bit key
NIST-validated AES and DES
Automatic key generation and exchange
Mix of DES/AES possible in the same conference
;=\6"8C6@6?X2X=B?@
Broadcast of presentations (DuoVideo
TF
, H.239 and
BFCP**)
;=\6"\=S6B"C6@B;>X=B?@
NATIVE PAL:
QCIF (176 x 144 pixels)
CIF (352 x 288 pixels)
448p (576 x 448 pixels)*
4CIF (704 x 576 pixels)
NATIVE NTSC:
SIF (352 x 240 pixels)
400p (528 x 400 pixels)*
4SIF (704 x 480 pixels)
NATIVE PC RESOLUTIONS:
VGA (640 x 480 pixels)
SVGA (800 x 600 pixels)
XGA (1024 x 768 pixels)
NATIVE WIDESCREEN RESOLUTIONS:
w288p (512 x 288 pixels) w448p (768 x 448 pixels) w576p (1023 x 576 pixels) w720p (1280 x 720p)
@65>C=X["A62X>C6@
Network authentication (H.235)
Embedded audio/video encryption (H.235)
Secure management & control (HTTPS, SSH)
Participant authentication (password, Dial In number and caller ID)
IP administration passwords
Services may be disabled: Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP,
SSH
=8"?6X]BC^"A62X>C6@
Expressway NAT and firewall traversal
Intelligent Packet Loss Recovery (IPLR)
Automatic call rate adjustments
URI dialling
QoS (DiffServ, IP Precedence and TOS)
H.245 DTMF tones in H.323
Centralized management via embedded Web server using HTTPS, XML, SOAP, SSH and Telnet
1 x RS-232 for local control and diagnostics
Endpoints on two different IP networks in the same conference
Automatic/manual error control
IPv6 Enabled - IPv4-IPv6 Dual Stack
=@S?"?6X]BC^"A62X>C6@
ISDN-PRI E1/T1
ISDN PRI G.703 and E1/T1, Leased Line
Non-Facilities Associated Signalling (NFAS)
Automatic downspeeding
Automatic call rate adjustments
183
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Contents
W/)X*()!"&5-/)(;)!'(#*%R
cont...
TANDBERG MPS 800
Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Advanced diagnostic tools
Automatic/manual error control
?6X]BC^"=?X6CA256@
2 x LAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbit on the system controller board
Up to 8 x LAN/Ethernet (RJ-45) 10/100 Mbit for media processing board
Up to 32 x E1/T1 (RJ-45) for ISDN PRIs and/or G.703
Up to 128 x V.35/RS-366 ports
6X#6C?6XR=?X6C?6XR=?XC2?6X"5B??65X=\=X[
TCP/IP, SSL, ARP, Telnet, HTTP, HTTPS, XML, SOAP
Embedded web server for total conference and call control
10/100 Mbps full/half duplex (manual or auto detect selection)
BX#6C"@>88BCX6S"@X2?S2CS@
H.221, H.231, H.241, H.242, H.243, H.245, H.320,
H.239, H.323, BONDING (ISO 13871), Q.931, SIP,
H261, H263+, H264, G711, G.722, G.722.1, G728,
MPEG4 AAC-LD
288CB\2;@
Directive 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive)
– Standard EN 60950
Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)
– Standard EN 55022, Class A
– Standard EN 55024
– Standard EN 61000-3-2/-3-3
Directive 1999/5/EEC (R&TTE Directive)
– Standard TBR4
Approved according to UL 60950 and CAN/CSA C22.2
No. 60950
Complies with FCC15B Class A
6?\=CB?:6?X2;"S2X2
Operating temperature:
0°C to 35°C (32°F to 95°F) ambient temperature
Relative Humidity (RH):
10% to 90%
Storage and transport temperature:
-20 to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F) at RH 10–90% (noncondensing)
8B]6C
100–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz;
800W max. power consumption
>?=X"S=:6?@=B?@
Height 9U/399 mm/15.7”
Width 444 mm/17.4”
Depth 371 mm/14.6”
Net weight 44 lbs/20.0 kg
19” rack-mountable
* MCU only
** Binary Floor Control Protocol
All specifications subject to change without notice, system specifics may vary.
All images in these materials are for representational purposes only, actual products may d i f f e r.
TANDBERG and Expressway are registered trademarks or trademarks of TANDBERG in the U.S. and other countries.
All other trademarks are property of their respective owners.
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
Administrator Guide
Contact us
184
Contents
MPS 200/800
Introduction Getting started Using the MPS System status System configuration Gateway configuration MCU configuration
Administrator Guide
Appendices
EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS
Philip Pedersens vei 20, 1366 Lysaker, Norway
Telephone: +47 67 125 125
Fax: +47 67 125 234
Video: +47 67 126 126
E-mail: [email protected]
U.S. HEADQUARTERS
1212 Avenue of the Americas 24th Floor, New York, NY 10036
Telephone: +1 212 692 6500
Fax: +1 212 692 6501
Video: +1 212 692 6535
E-mail: [email protected]
D14033.10—APRIL 2009
185
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 4 Introduction
- 5 What’s new in version J4.5?
- 6 Disclaimer, Patent Info, License Agreement, Trademark & Copyright
- 7 Third Party Software, Licenses and Copyright
- 13 Safety Instructions
- 14 Environmental Issues
- 15 China RoHS Table
- 16 Features overview and MPS capacity
- 17 TANDBERG MPS at a Glance
- 18 Getting started
- 19 Precautions, Unpacking and Mounting
- 20 System overview
- 20 MPS 200 with 2 Media Processing Boards
- 21 MPS 200 with ISDN and V.35 Network Cards
- 22 MPS 800 with 8 Media Processing Cards
- 23 MPS 800 with ISDN and V.35 Network Cards
- 24 Connecting cables
- 25 Starting up the system
- 26 The LCD interface
- 27 System Controller Board
- 28 Media Processing Board
- 29 The web interface
- 30 Quick setup
- 30 Step 1: IP Configuration
- 31 Step 2: H.323 Configuration
- 32 Step 3: PRI Configuration
- 33 Step 4: Dial In Configuration
- 34 Using the MPS
- 35 MCU Overview, Usage Information
- 36 MCU Conference Overview
- 38 Create conference
- 38 Conference Configuration
- 40 Video, Conference Layout
- 41 Video settings
- 45 Audio settings
- 46 Security settings
- 48 Participants settings
- 49 Network settings
- 50 Manage an active conference
- 51 Overview MCU
- 51 Conference Status
- 53 Add Participants
- 56 Add Participants - Examples
- 57 Edit Conference Configuration
- 58 Dial-In Configuration
- 59 Conference status, the Basic tab
- 62 Conference status, the Advanced tab
- 63 Conference status, the Terminal List tab
- 64 Conference status, the Change tab
- 65 The Gateway
- 65 Gateway Features
- 65 Gateway Capacity
- 66 Gateway Usage Information
- 67 Gateway Calls Overview
- 68 Disconnect a Gateway call
- 69 Transfer a Gateway call
- 70 The Phone book
- 71 My Contacts, Add New Entry
- 72 My Contacts, Edit New Entry
- 73 Add Group Entry
- 74 System status
- 75 H.320 Board Status
- 76 ISDN PRI Board Status
- 77 G.703 Board Status
- 78 Serial V.35 Board Status
- 79 Media Board IP Status
- 80 H.323 Status
- 81 SIP Status
- 82 System Information
- 85 System configuration
- 86 H.320 Board Configuration
- 87 PRI Board Configuration
- 94 G.703 Board Configuration
- 96 IP Configuration
- 98 Media Board Configuration
- 99 Serial V.35 Board Configuration
- 101 H.323 Configuration
- 107 Language, Set Language and Language files
- 108 Language, Files.., Dialog pictures
- 109 Language, Files.., Dialog Sounds and Symbols
- 110 Configuration using XML
- 111 Certificate Management
- 112 Gateway configuration
- 113 Gateway Functionality and Dialling Rules
- 114 Gateway Configuration
- 114 Dialling Rules
- 115 Examples of dialling rules with ISDN Gateway
- 116 Examples of dialling rules with V.35 Gateway
- 117 Examples of dialling rules with G.703 Gateway
- 118 Gateway Settings
- 122 MCU configuration
- 123 MCU Configuration
- 123 The Dial-In Numbers menu overview
- 124 The Single Dial-In Number menu
- 125 The AdHoc Conferences menu
- 126 The Static Conferences menu
- 128 The Personal Conferences menu
- 130 The Direct AdHoc Conferences menu
- 131 The Network Profiles menu
- 132 Conference Template Configuration
- 133 MCU Conference Template
- 134 Conference Layouts
- 135 Video settings
- 139 Audio settings
- 140 Security settings
- 142 Participants settings
- 143 Network settings
- 144 MCU Configuration
- 144 File Management
- 146 Appendices
- 147 The System Controller Board Interface
- 148 The Media Processing Board Interface
- 149 E1/T1 Network Interface Card (IIC-8)
- 152 V.35 Serial Interface Card (SIC-32)
- 153 Cable Description
- 154 Power Supplies
- 155 MPS 800–Inserting additional network interface cards
- 156 MPS 200–Inserting additional network interface cards
- 157 About the Quality of Service (QoS) feature
- 158 About video features
- 160 About other features
- 162 Distributed MCUs
- 163 Ports and Packet Sizes
- 164 Secure Conference (Encryption)
- 165 System Management Tools
- 166 System Management and Security
- 167 Product Approvals and CE Declarations
- 168 SIP - Current RFC’s and Drafts Supported
- 169 Configuring LCS and MPS for SIP
- 175 Configuring OCS 2007 and MPS for SIP
- 181 Technical Specifications
- 181 TANDBERG MPS 200
- 183 TANDBERG MPS 800